scm605 en sales
TRANSCRIPT
SCM605 Sales SCM605
Release 470 03.06.2004
SCM605 Sales ..............................................................................................................................................................................1
Copyright...................................................................................................................................................................................2
Target Group........................................................................................................................................................................3
Course Overview.....................................................................................................................................................................1
Course Goals ........................................................................................................................................................................2
Course Objectives ...............................................................................................................................................................3
Course Content ....................................................................................................................................................................4
Course Overview Diagram................................................................................................................................................5
Main Business Scenario .....................................................................................................................................................6
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................1
Introduction: Topic Objectives .........................................................................................................................................2
Introduction: Course Overview Diagram........................................................................................................................3
Introduction: Business Scenario .......................................................................................................................................4
Processes in Sales and Distribution..................................................................................................................................5
Where Does Sales Fit Into the Sales and Dis tribution Process?.................................................................................6
Sales Document Structure..................................................................................................................................................7
Summary ...............................................................................................................................................................................8
Exercise Data Sheet ............................................................................................................................................................9
Introduction - Exercises ...................................................................................................................................................10
Introduction - Solutions....................................................................................................................................................13
Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution..................................................................................................................1
Enterprise Structures: Topic Objectives..........................................................................................................................2
Enterprise Structures: Course Overview Diagram........................................................................................................3
Enterprise Structures: Business Scenario........................................................................................................................4
Enterprise Structures in the SAP R/3 System ................................................................................................................5
How SD Is Integrated in Financial Accounting.............................................................................................................6
Organizational Structures in Sales ...................................................................................................................................7
Sales Organization ..............................................................................................................................................................8
Distribution channel............................................................................................................................................................9
Division...............................................................................................................................................................................10
Sales Area...........................................................................................................................................................................11
Sales Office and Sales Group..........................................................................................................................................12
Plant.....................................................................................................................................................................................13
Delivering Plant.................................................................................................................................................................14
Enterprise Structures: Conclusion..................................................................................................................................15
Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution - Exercises.......................................................................................16
Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution - Solutions.......................................................................................22
Sales Order Processing...........................................................................................................................................................1
Sales Order Processing: Topic Objectives ......................................................................................................................2
Sales Order Processing: Course Overview Diagram ....................................................................................................3
Sales Order Processing: Business Scenario ....................................................................................................................4
Overview: Sources for Document Data...........................................................................................................................5
Sales Order Entry - Deriving the Sales Area..................................................................................................................6
Proposing Order Data from Master Data ........................................................................................................................7
Business Partners from the Customer Master................................................................................................................8
Proposing Order Data from the Customer Master.........................................................................................................9
Business Data.....................................................................................................................................................................10
Proposing Plants Automatically .....................................................................................................................................11
Sales Summary ..................................................................................................................................................................12
Overview: Changing Sales Documents.........................................................................................................................13
Blocks..................................................................................................................................................................................14
Rejections...........................................................................................................................................................................15
Change Sold-to Party in Sales Document.....................................................................................................................16
Sales Order Processing: Summary .................................................................................................................................17
Sales Order Processing - Exercises................................................................................................................................18
Sales Order Processing - Solutions................................................................................................................................22
Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types .............................................................................................1
Sales Document Type: Topic Objectives.......................................................................................................................2
Sales Document Type: Course Overview Diagram.....................................................................................................3
Sales Document Type: Business Scenario.....................................................................................................................4
Controlling Business Processes in Sales .........................................................................................................................5
Basic Functions ...................................................................................................................................................................6
Examples of Sales Document Types................................................................................................................................7
Functions in the Sales Document Type...........................................................................................................................8
Order Types Permitted for Sales Areas...........................................................................................................................9
Sales Document Type: Summary ..................................................................................................................................10
Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types - Exercises..................................................................11
Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types - Solutions..................................................................13
Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category ......................................................................................................1
Item Category: Topic Objectives......................................................................................................................................2
Item Category: Course Overview Diagram....................................................................................................................3
Item Category: Business Scenario....................................................................................................................................4
Examples of Item Categories ............................................................................................................................................5
Item Category Functions....................................................................................................................................................6
Controlling the Items in the Sales Document.................................................................................................................7
Subitems ...............................................................................................................................................................................8
Assignment: Item Category to Sales Document Type..................................................................................................9
BOMs: Example: Computer............................................................................................................................................10
Exploding Bills of Material in Sales Documents.........................................................................................................11
Item Category: Summary .................................................................................................................................................12
Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category - Exercises...........................................................................13
-Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category - Solutions .........................................................................18
Controlling Sales Documents with Schedule Line Categories ........................................................................................1
Schedule Line Category: Topic Objectives ....................................................................................................................2
Schedule line category: Course Overview Diagram.....................................................................................................3
Schedule Line Category: Business Scenario ..................................................................................................................4
Examples of Schedule Line Categories ...........................................................................................................................5
Schedule Line Category .....................................................................................................................................................6
Controlling Schedule Lines in Sales Documents...........................................................................................................7
Assignment: Schedule Line Category to Item Category ..............................................................................................8
Schedule line category: Summary ....................................................................................................................................9
Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines - Exercises......................................................................................10
Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines - Solutions......................................................................................13
Data Flow..................................................................................................................................................................................1
Data Flow: Unit Objectives ...............................................................................................................................................2
Data Flow: Course Overview Diagram...........................................................................................................................3
Data Flow: Business Scenario...........................................................................................................................................4
Create with Reference: Dialog..........................................................................................................................................5
Create with Reference: Item Selection (1)......................................................................................................................6
Create with Reference: Item Selection (2)......................................................................................................................7
Create with Reference: Item Selection (3)......................................................................................................................8
Create with Reference: Copy ............................................................................................................................................9
Completion Rule and Reference Status.........................................................................................................................10
Document Flow - List.......................................................................................................................................................11
Copying Control in SD.....................................................................................................................................................12
Copying Control for Sales Documents..........................................................................................................................13
Copying Requirements.....................................................................................................................................................14
Data Flow: Summary ........................................................................................................................................................15
Data Flow - Exercises.......................................................................................................................................................16
Data Flow - Solutions.......................................................................................................................................................19
Special Business Transactions...............................................................................................................................................1
Special Business Transactions: Objectives.....................................................................................................................2
Special Business Transactions: Course Overview Diagram........................................................................................3
Special Business Transactions: Business Scenario .......................................................................................................4
Rush Orders..........................................................................................................................................................................5
Cash Sales.............................................................................................................................................................................6
Consignment Processing....................................................................................................................................................7
Deliveries Free of Charge and Subsequent Deliveries .................................................................................................8
Special Business Transactions: Summary.......................................................................................................................9
Special Business Transactions - Exercises ...................................................................................................................10
Special Business Transactions - Solutions....................................................................................................................14
Incompletion.............................................................................................................................................................................1
Incompletion: Objectives ...................................................................................................................................................2
Incompletion: Course Overview Diagram......................................................................................................................3
Incompleteness: Business Scenario..................................................................................................................................4
Incompleteness Log............................................................................................................................................................5
Lists of Incomplete Orders ................................................................................................................................................6
Incomplete Sales Documents ............................................................................................................................................7
Controlling the Incompleteness Log................................................................................................................................8
Status of Incomplete Sales Documents ...........................................................................................................................9
Incompletion: Summary ...................................................................................................................................................10
Incompleteness - Exercises..............................................................................................................................................11
Incompleteness - Solutions..............................................................................................................................................14
Business Partners and Partner Determination.....................................................................................................................1
Partner Determination: Topic Objectives........................................................................................................................2
Partner Determination: Course Overview Diagram......................................................................................................3
Partner Determination: Business Scenario......................................................................................................................4
Business Partners.................................................................................................................................................................5
Partner types.........................................................................................................................................................................6
Partner Functions.................................................................................................................................................................7
Partners in the Sales Process.............................................................................................................................................8
Partner Determination Procedure (1) ...............................................................................................................................9
Partner Determination Procedure (2) .............................................................................................................................10
Partner Determination Procedure (3) .............................................................................................................................11
Partner Determination Procedure (4) .............................................................................................................................12
Customer Master and Account Group...........................................................................................................................13
Permitted Partner Functions per Account Groups.......................................................................................................14
Partner Determination for Sales Documents ................................................................................................................15
Partner Determination: Unit Summary ..........................................................................................................................16
Business Partners and Partner Determination - Exercises .........................................................................................17
Business Partners and Partner Determination - Solutions..........................................................................................20
Outline Agreements.................................................................................................................................................................1
Outline Agreements: Unit Objectives..............................................................................................................................2
Outline Agreements: Course Overview Diagram..........................................................................................................3
Outline Agreements: Business Scenario .........................................................................................................................4
Contracts - Sales Document Types ..................................................................................................................................5
Scheduling Agreements .....................................................................................................................................................6
Quantity Contracts ..............................................................................................................................................................7
Messages Regarding Open Outline Agreements ...........................................................................................................8
Value Contracts ...................................................................................................................................................................9
Valid Materials ..................................................................................................................................................................10
Value Contracts - Release Orders ..................................................................................................................................11
Billing Value Contracts....................................................................................................................................................12
Controlling Value Contracts............................................................................................................................................13
Partners Authorized to Release in Contract..................................................................................................................14
Partners Authorized to Release: Customer List...........................................................................................................15
Contract Data in Sales Documents.................................................................................................................................16
Determining Dates ............................................................................................................................................................17
Outline Agreements: Summary ......................................................................................................................................18
Outline Agreements - Exercises .....................................................................................................................................19
Outline Agreements - Solutions......................................................................................................................................22
Material Determination and Listing / Exclusion ................................................................................................................1
Material Determination: Objectives.................................................................................................................................2
Material Determination: Course Overview Diagram....................................................................................................3
Material Determination: Business Scenario ...................................................................................................................4
Determining Materials ........................................................................................................................................................5
Selecting Products Manually.............................................................................................................................................6
Master Data..........................................................................................................................................................................7
Automatic Product Selection.............................................................................................................................................8
Automatic Product Selection - Master Data ...................................................................................................................9
Material Determination - Condition Technique (1) ....................................................................................................10
Material Determination - Condition Technique (2) ....................................................................................................11
Material Determination - Condition Technique (3) ....................................................................................................12
Material Determination - Condition Technique (4) ....................................................................................................13
Material Determination - Condition Technique (5) ....................................................................................................14
Material Determination - Condition Technique (6) ....................................................................................................15
Material Listing and Exclusion.......................................................................................................................................16
Material Determination: Summary.................................................................................................................................17
Material Substitution and Lists Exercises.....................................................................................................................18
Material Substitution and Lists Solutions.....................................................................................................................20
Free Goods................................................................................................................................................................................1
Free Goods: Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................2
Free Goods: Course Overview Diagram.........................................................................................................................3
Free Goods: Business Scenario.........................................................................................................................................4
Exclusive and Inclusive Bonus Quantities (1) ...............................................................................................................5
Exclusive and Inclusive Bonus Quantities (2) ...............................................................................................................6
Free Goods in the Sales Order ..........................................................................................................................................7
Free Goods - Master Data..................................................................................................................................................8
Free Goods - Calculation Rule ..........................................................................................................................................9
Free Goods - Statistics and Controlling ......................................................................................................................10
Free Goods - Condition Technique...............................................................................................................................11
Free Goods: Unit Summary .............................................................................................................................................12
Free Goods - Exercises.....................................................................................................................................................13
Free Goods - Solutions.....................................................................................................................................................15
Introduction: Summary ...........................................................................................................................................................1
Course Objectives ...............................................................................................................................................................2
Recommended Follow-Up Activities ..............................................................................................................................3
LO606 Sales Support ..............................................................................................................................................................1
Contents ................................................................................................................................................................................2
Data Used in the Exercises ................................................................................................................................................3
Sales to Employees..................................................................................................................................................................1
Sales to Employees - Business Background.................................................................................................................2
Sales to Employees - Orders ............................................................................................................................................3
Sales to Employees - Delivery .........................................................................................................................................4
Sales to Employees - Billing Document ........................................................................................................................5
Sales to Employees - Tasks ..............................................................................................................................................6
-...............................................................................................................................................................................................7
-.............................................................................................................................................................................................15
Bills of Materials ......................................................................................................................................................................1
Bills of Materials - Business Background....................................................................................................................2
Bills of Materials - Requirements ...................................................................................................................................3
Bills of Materials - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 1................................................................................................4
Bills of Materials - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 2................................................................................................5
Bills of Materials - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 3................................................................................................6
Bills of Materials - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order...................................................................................................7
Bills of Materials - Tasks..................................................................................................................................................8
-...............................................................................................................................................................................................9
-.............................................................................................................................................................................................19
Material Determination...........................................................................................................................................................1
Material Determination - Business Background..........................................................................................................2
Material Determination - Order......................................................................................................................................3
Material Determination - Condition Technique (6) ......................................................................................................4
Material Determination - Customizing .........................................................................................................................5
Material Determination - Substitution Reason.............................................................................................................6
Material Determination - Tasks .......................................................................................................................................7
-...............................................................................................................................................................................................8
-.............................................................................................................................................................................................16
Appendix...................................................................................................................................................................................1
Appendix: Contents ............................................................................................................................................................2
Table Structure for Customers - SD View......................................................................................................................3
Table Structure for Customer Hierarchies ......................................................................................................................4
Table Structure for Materials ............................................................................................................................................5
Table Structure for Customer - Material Information...................................................................................................6
Table Structure for Bills of Material................................................................................................................................7
Table Structure for Sales Activities .................................................................................................................................8
Sales Document Tables - Header .....................................................................................................................................9
Sales Document Tables - Item........................................................................................................................................10
Index Tables .......................................................................................................................................................................11
Customer Matchcodes......................................................................................................................................................12
Contact Partners - Matchcodes .......................................................................................................................................13
Material Matchcodes ........................................................................................................................................................14
Bill of Material Matchcodes............................................................................................................................................15
Sales Activity Matchcodes ..............................................................................................................................................16
Sales Order Matchcodes...................................................................................................................................................17
Authorization Objects - Customer Masters ..................................................................................................................18
Authorization Objects - Material Masters.....................................................................................................................19
Authorization Objects - Bills of Materials ....................................................................................................................20
Authorization Objects - Sales Activities .......................................................................................................................21
Authorization Objects - Sales Document Types..........................................................................................................22
Delivery block...................................................................................................................................................................23
Cancellation........................................................................................................................................................................24
Customizing for Cancellations........................................................................................................................................25
Grouping Contracts...........................................................................................................................................................26
Grouping Contracts - Lower-Level Contracts..............................................................................................................27
Referencing Requirements ..............................................................................................................................................28
Frequently Used Menu Paths ..........................................................................................................................................29
Data Used in the Exercises ..............................................................................................................................................35
Service Orders ...................................................................................................................................................................38
Service Orders - Business Background.......................................................................................................................39
Service Orders - Order Before Repairs ........................................................................................................................40
Service Orders - Order After Repairs ..........................................................................................................................41
Service Orders - Delivery ..............................................................................................................................................42
Service Orders - Billing Documents............................................................................................................................43
Service Orders - Tasks ...................................................................................................................................................44
-.............................................................................................................................................................................................45
-.............................................................................................................................................................................................56
SAP AG 2003
SCM605 Sales
THE BEST-RUN BUSINESSES RUN SAP
© SAP AG 2003
SCM605Sales
n Release SAP R/3 Enterprise n 2003/Q2 n Material number: 5005 8904
SAP AG 2003
Copyright 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.
All rights reserved.
Copyright
Trademarks: n Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software
components of other software vendors. n Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. n IBM®, DB2®, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA, AIX®, S/390®,
AS/400®, OS/390®, OS/400®, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere®, Netfinity®, Tivoli®, Informix and Informix® Dynamic ServerTM are trademarks of IBM Corporation in USA and/or other countries.
n ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation. n UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group. n Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®,
VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.
n HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
n JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. n JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for
technology invented and implemented by Netscape. n MarketSet and Enterprise Buyer are jointly owned trademarks of SAP AG and Commerce One. n SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, and other SAP products and services mentioned
herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies.
SAP AG 2003
Target Group
l Participants:
n Project team staff
n Organizers
l Duration: 5 days
Note to Users n These training materials do not represent a self-study program. Your materials are only complete
together with the explanations from your course instructor. Your materials provide space for making your own notes.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Course Overview
l Course Goals
l Course Objectives
l Course Content
l Course Overview Diagram
l Main Business Scenario
Contents:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Course Goals
This course will provide you with:
l An extensive overview of Sales in the SD application module in the R/3 System
l Detailed explanations of selected examples
l The knowledge needed to set up and use these functions
l An understanding of how to adjust the system to meet your specific requirements in Sales
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Course Objectives
At the conclusion of this course, you will be able to:
l Integrate sales in the SD process chain
l Configure Customizing so that it represents your specific sales requirements
l Find and use Help within the system
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
Course Content
Preface
Sales Workshop
Appendix
Unit 1 Course Overview
Unit 2 Introduction
Unit 3 Enterprise Structuresin Sales
Unit 4 Sales Order Processing
Unit 5 Sales Document Type
Unit 6 Item Category
Unit 7 Schedule Line Category
Unit 8 Data Flow
Unit 9 Special BusinessTransactions
Unit 10 Incompleteness
Unit 11 Partner Determination
Unit 12 Outline Agreements
Unit 13 Material Determination
Unit 14 Free Goods
Unit 15 Summary
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 1999
Course Overview Diagram
§§
0,--ORORLFLFF2F2
7. Data flow8. Special Business
Transactions
9. Incompletion
12. Materialdetermination
2. Organizationalunits
4. Sales document type
11. Outlineagreements
13. Freegoods
6. Schedule line cat.
5. Item category
1. Introduction
3. Sales Order Processing
10. Partnerdetermination
XYZ/99XYZ/99M1M1 -?--?-
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 1999
Main Business Scenario
l The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers.To process the business transaction, you have to enter the transaction as a sales order in the R/3 System.
l Once you have verified in the system that the delivery can take place in accordance with the customer's wishes, you send the customer an order confirmation.
l The further steps in sales are triggered by the sales order and supplied with all the necessary information.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Introduction
l Where does sales fit into the sales and distribution process?
l Sales document structure
l Screens and information in the sales document
Unit Contents:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Introduction: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
l Explain how Sales links into the sales and distribution chain
l Describe the structure of a sales document
l Locate information stored in the sales document
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Introduction: Course Overview Diagram
7. Data flow8. Special Business
Transactions
9. Incompletion
12. Materialdetermination
2. Organizationalunits
4. Sales document type
XYZ/99M1 -?-
11. Outlineagreements§
13. Freegoods
0,--
6. Schedule line cat.
5. Item category
1. Introduction
3. Sales Order Processing
10. Partnerdetermination
ORORLFLFF2F2
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
Introduction: Business Scenario
l Your company, IDES Inc., wants to implement the SAP R/3 SD module.
l Sales and distribution processes will also be modeled in the R/3 System in future.
l It is your responsibility to familiarize yourself with the SD functionality in the R/3 System. You are particularly interested in how sales fits into the process chain.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 1999
Processes in Sales and Distribution
MMAATTEERRIIAALLSS
MMAANNAAGGEEMMEENNTT
SalesSalesInformationInformation
SystemSystem
USD
SalessupportSalessupport
SalesSales
Shipping Shipping
BillingBilling
Financial accountingFinancial accounting
Outbound delivery
Debit memo Credit memoInvoice
Free-of-chargedelivery Order
Contract
Sched. agt
Sales activity
Inquiry
Quotation
Shipment
ReturnsFree-of-charge
subsequent delivery
n Every sales activity that you undertake in R/3 is recorded with a sales document. n You can represent different business processes in Sales, Shipping and Billing with specifically
designed document types: � Sales document types (for example inquiries, quotations, standard orders) � Delivery types (for example deliveries, return deliveries) � Billing document types (for example, invoices, credit memos, debit memos)
n Each document is identified with a unique document number. Matchcodes help you search for documents.
n Each document is assigned an overall status that reflects its processing status. The overall status depends on the different status values in the document. These different values reflect the processing status of the different steps of the sales activity.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 1999
• Follows up activities from sales support• Enters orders• Determines prices• Decides on delivery requirements• Decides on requirements for creating
invoices• Updates status and document flow• Updates the Sales Information System• Transfers requirements
Where Does Sales Fit Into the Sales and Distribution Process?
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 1999
Item 10
Business dataConditionsPartnersTextsPurchase order dataetc.
Business data Conditions TextsPartnersetc.
SalesShippingProcurement
Header
Schedule line 1
Item 20Schedule line 1
Schedule line 2
Sales Document Structure
n Each business process in the SAP System is represented as a document. For example, a sales document is created during sales order processing.
n The sales document consists of a document header and as many items as required. Each item can in turn contain as many schedule lines as needed.
n The document header contains general data and default values that are valid for the whole document. n The document items contain data about the goods and services ordered by the customer. This
includes material numbers, descriptions, prices and terms of delivery and payment. n Data for shipping and procurement is located in schedule lines. Because the delivery deadline and
order quantity are found in schedule lines, each line item with delivery requirements must contain at least one schedule line.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 1999
Summary
You are now able to:
l Explain how Sales links into the sales and distribution chain
l Describe the structure of a sales document
l Locate information stored in the sales document
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
Exercise Data Sheet
Key to Icons in Exercises and Solutions
Exercises
Solutions
Course Objectives
Business Scenario
Hints and Tips
Warning or Caution
The data on which the exercises are based was generated as a copy of the data from the IDES system. This enables you to run through the exercises again in an IDES system.
To do this, we recommend creating your own copies of the IDES data. For information on which data to use as a copy template, please refer to the Appendix.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
Introduction - Exercises
Unit: Introduction
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Find important information in the sales order screens
• Generate a subsequent document and display the document flow
You are working in the order entry department and answer a telephone inquiry about a computer monitor. Based on this inquiry, you check your product line and create a quotation. Your customer places an order based on this quotation.
1-1 Your customer, T-S62A##, is interested in ordering your material T-ATA##.
1-1-1 Enter the inquiry with purchase order number ##LO605-IN01. Your customer needs 20 units and wants delivery in two weeks.
Inquiry number: ___________________________________
When you enter the inquiry, remember to take the requested delivery date into account.
1-1-2 Enter a corresponding quotation with reference to the inquiry (assign purchase order number ##LO605-OT01). Limit the validity of your quotation to one month.
Quotation number: __________________________________
Make sure to create with reference to the inquiry. To do this, choose Create with reference.
1-1-3 After checking the quotation, your customer decides to order 5 units of the product. The requested delivery date is two weeks from today. Enter the
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
standard order with purchase order ##LO605-OR01.
Order number: ___________________________________
Make sure to create with reference to the quotation. To do this, choose Create with reference.
1-1-4 Use the document flow from the quotation to see an overview of this sales process. What is the overall processing status of each document?
Inquiry: _________________________________ Quotation: _________________________________ Order: _________________________________
1-1-5 Optional
After checking the product, your customer decides to order the remaining 15 units. The requested delivery date is two weeks from today. Create another order with reference to your quotation. It should have purchase order number ##LO605-OR02.
1-1-6 Optional
Review the sales process by viewing document flow for the quotation. What is the overall processing status of each document now?
Inquiry: _________________________________ Quotation: _________________________________ Order: _________________________________ Order: _________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
1-2 You want to collect detailed information about the business transaction. To do this, display the inquiry, bring up document flow, and from there navigate into different documents as needed.
1-2-1 What is the unit price of the monitor in one of the orders?
Material price per unit (PR00): ____________________________________
1-2-2 Which of your sales offices is responsible for this sale?
Sales office: ____________________________________
1-2-3 What is the name of the sales employee responsible for the sale?
Name: ____________________________________
1-2-4 Which division does your product belong to and which material pricing group has it been assigned to?
Division: ____________________________________
Material pricing group: ____________________________________
1-2-5 Which plant, shipping point and route will be used to deliver the goods?
Plant: ____________________________________
Shipping point: ____________________________________
Route: ____________________________________
1-2-6 What are the terms of delivery (Incoterms) and payment for your customer?
Incoterms: ____________________________________
Payment terms: ____________________________________
1-2-7 What date has the delivery been confirmed for?
Confirmed delivery date: ____________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
Introduction - Solutions
Unit: Introduction
1-1 Process the business transaction.
1-1-1 Create the inquiry and save the document.
à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Inquiry à Create
Inquiry type: AF Customer: T-S62A## Purchase order number: ##LO605-IN01
Req. delivery date: Two weeks from today Material: T-ATA## (20 units)
Save the document.
1-1-2 Create the quotation with a reference to the inquiry.
à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Create
Quotation type: OR
Choose Create with reference.
Inquiry number: From the above inquiry
Choose Copy.
Validity: From Today to one month from today Purchase order number: ##LO605-OT01
Save the document.
1-1-3 Create the order with reference to the quotation.
à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Order à Create
Order type: OR
Choose Create with reference.
Quotation number: From the above quotation Requested delivery date: Two weeks from today
Choose Selection list.
Reduce the quantity.
Choose Copy.
PO number: ##LO605-OR01
Save the document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
1-1-4 Display the document flow for the quotation.
à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Display
Choose Display document flow.
Inquiry: Completed
Quotation: Being processed
Order: Open
1-1-5 Optional
Create another order with reference to the quotation.
à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Order à Create
Order type: OR
Choose Create with reference.
Quotation number: From the above quotation Requested delivery date: Two weeks from today
Choose Copy.
PO number: ##LO605-OR02
Save the document.
1-1-6 Optional
Display the document flow for the quotation.
à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Display
Choose Display document flow.
Inquiry: Completed
Quotation: Completed
Order: Open
Order: Open
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
1-2 Find the required information in the documents.
1-2-1 Display the document flow for the Inquiry. Determine the unit price in the Conditions item screen.
à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Inquiry à Display
Choose Display document flow.
Select an order and choose Display document.
Select the item and choose Item conditions
Unit price (PR00): 2.299,-
1-2-2 Choose à Goto à Header and then Sales.
Sales office: 1000 Frankfurt office
1-2-3 Choose tab page Partners.
Sales employee: 1701 Melanie Mayer
1-2-4 Select the item, choose Display Item Details and then choose Sales B.
Division: 07 High Tech Material pricing group: Standard parts
1-2-5 Choose Shipping.
Plant: 1200 Dresden Shipping point: 1200 Shipping point Dresden Route: R00130 Dresden - Frankfurt
1-2-6 Choose Billing.
Incoterms: CFR Mainz Payment terms: ZB01 14 days 3%, 30/2%, 45 net
1-2-7 Choose Schedule lines.
Confirmed delivery date: Date of line with the confirmed quantity
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution
Unit Contents:
l Organizational units in the SAP R/3 System
l Organizational Structures in Sales
l Including Sales in the enterprise organizational structure
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Enterprise Structures: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
l Use organizational units in the SAP R/3 System to model the different areas at your company
l Set up enterprise structures by assigning them to organizational units
l Adjust the organizational structures to meet the legal and business requirements of your company
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Enterprise Structures: Course Overview Diagram
XYZ/99M1 -?-
§
0,--ORORLFLFF2F2
7. Data flow8. Special business
transactions
9. Incomp-leteness
12. Materialdetermination
2. Organizationalunits
4. Sales document type
11. Outlineagreements
13. Freegoods
6. Schedule line cat.
5. Item category
1. Introduction
3. Sales Order Processing
10. Partnerdetermination
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
Enterprise Structures: Business Scenario
l Your company, IDES Inc., has been using the SAP R/3 SD module successfully for years
l Company management has now decided to expand the company's sales activities. In the future, customers should also be able to place orders at trade fairs
l It must be possible to control and evaluate the new sales activities separately from all existing activities
l Your responsibility is to expand the enterprise structure in sales accordingly
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 1999
Enterprise Structures in the SAP R/3 System
Enterprise structuresEnterprise Enterprise structuresstructures
Cost accountingCost accounting
External logisticsExternal logistics
AccountingAccounting
Internal logistics(materials plan./production)
Internal logistics(materials plan./production)
Inventory managementInventory management
Organizational units in the SAP system
Organizational units in the Organizational units in the SAP systemSAP system
Sales organizationsSales organizations Purchasing organizationsPurchasing organizations
Company codesCompany codes
Valuation areasValuation areas
Storage locations/Batches/Special stocksStorage locations/Batches/Special stocks
PlantsPlants
CompanyCompany
Controlling areasControlling areas
Objectives of the organizational structures in R/3 are to: n Achieve flexibility in representing complex corporate structures n Adapt to changes in the corporate structure n Distinguish between views in logistics (sales and distribution, purchasing, etc.), cost accounting and
financial accounting n Process data across company codes
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 1999
How SD Is Integrated in Financial Accounting
Client
Company code1000
1000
2000
3000
4000
Company code2000
1000
2000
Businessarea 4000
n All of the organizational units within a client are subject to one business control. Therefore, a client can be considered to be a synonym for the group.
n A client is a self-contained technical unit. General data and tables that are used for several organizational structures are stored at this level.
n You can use the company code and business area to represent a group from a financial accounting viewpoint.
n You can create several company codes for every client, in order to carry out financial accounting for several independent companies simultaneously. At least one company code must be created, however.
n Each company code represents an independent accounting unit. Several company codes can use the same chart of accounts.
n A business area is a separate business unit for which cross-company code internal reporting can be carried out. Business areas are not limited by company codes. For this reason, the business areas in all company codes must have the same description. Using this organizational unit is optional.
n You will use business areas if you if you want to calculate profit and loss statements independently of the company code. In the case of postings made from sales and distribution, the business area can be derived automatically.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 2003
Organizational Structures in Sales
Sales Organization
Distribution Channel
Division
Sales Area
10001000
Sales Office
Sales Group
n A variety of organizational units are available for modelling sales business transactions. In the sales area, the following organizational structures can be defined and used to model and structure the sales structures:
Sales organization Distribution channel Division Sales area Sales office Sales group
Other organizational units in SD, such as the shipping point and the transportation planning point, are covered in other SD courses.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 1999
Sales Organization
Client
Company code1000
SlOrg 1000
SlOrg 1020 SlOrg 2000
Company code2000
n A sales organization represents the organizational structures in sales and distribution. Each sales organization represents a selling unit as a legal entity. It is, for example, responsible for product liability and other customer rights of recourse. You can use sales organizations to subdivide markets into regions. Each business transaction is processed within a sales organization.
n A sales organization is assigned to exactly one company code. n A sales organization is assigned to one or more plants. n Each sales organization has its own master data, for example, its own customer and material master
data as well as condition records.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
SAP AG 1999
Distribution channel
12 Resale
SlOrg 1000
10 End customer
Distribution channel
n You can use different distribution channels in Sales and Distribution to provide the market with the best possible service. Distribution channels provide a general structure for distributing goods. Wholesale trade, sales to industrial customers or direct sales from a plant are typical examples of distribution channels.
n Distribution channels can be set up according to your company's market strategy or internal organization.
n Customers can be served through one or more distribution channels within a sales organization. n In addition, you can vary the master data relevant to sales, such as customer master data, sales master
data, prices, and surcharges/discounts, for each sales organization and distribution channel.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
SAP AG 1999
Division
SlOrg 1000
Division
07 High Tech02 Motorcycles
n A broad product range can be divided into divisions. In the SAP system, you can also define a division-specific sales structure.
n You can make customer-specific agreements for each division, for example regarding partial deliveries or pricing. Within a division, you can carry out statistical analyses or devise your own marketing strategies.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
SAP AG 2003
Sales Area
Sales Org.Frankfurt
Sales Org.London
Distribution ChannelEnd Customer
Distribution ChannelResale
DivisionMotorcycles
DivisionHigh Tech
DivisionMotorcycles
DivisionMotorcycles
DivisionHigh Tech
n A sales area is a combination of sales organization, distribution channel and division. n Sales documents, delivery documents, and billing documents are always assigned to a sales area.
Every sales process always takes place in a specific sales area. n The relevant master data can usually be maintained explicitly for each sales area, for example:
Sales-relevant customer master data Sales-relevant material master data (the division is a general field of the material master; as a
result, a material can only be assigned to one division.) Conditions (prices, discounts/surcharges)
n You can carry out analyses within a sales area, for example, by evaluating the sales volume. n You should try to keep the organizational structure of a sales area as simple as possible .
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
SAP AG 2003
Sales Office and Sales Group
Sales-personSales-person
Sales GroupSales Group
Sales OfficeSales Office
10001000
Sales Area
Sales OfficeNorthern Region
Group110
Cole
Group111
Brown
Group115
Bays
Sales OfficeSouthern Region
Group100
Young Wise
Group101
Miller Lopez
n Sales office � Geographical aspects of the organizational structures in business development and sales are
defined using sales offices. A sales office can be viewed as an actual office or perhaps a territory or region. Sales offices can be assigned to multiple sales areas. If you enter a sales order for a sales office within a particular sales area, the sales office must be permitted for that sales area.
n Sales group � Employees of a sales office can be assigned to sales groups defined for each division or
distribution channel. Sales groups are assigned to sales offices. n Salesperson � A sales group consists of a certain number of salespersons. A salesperson is assigned to a sales
office and group in the sales employee master record. Thereafter you can select this personnel master record in the partner screen of a sales document.
n You can carry out sales analyses on the different internal organization levels.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
SAP AG 1999
Plant
Client
Company code1000
Plant . . .
Company code3000
Plant . . .
Plant 1200
Plant 1000
Plant 3100
Plant 3000
n Materials management is primarily concerned with the flow of materials within a company. Production facilities and locations for storing stock must therefore be defined in the system. The terms used in the system for these entities are plant and storage location. Material stocks can be described in detail at the level of different storage locations within a plant.
n A plant can either be a location for production and material requirements planning (MRP) or it may simply represent one or more material stock locations in close proximity to one another.
n Each plant is assigned to a unique company code. n For a plant to deliver goods to customers, it must be configured appropriately as a delivering plant in
SD customizing. During the sales process, the delivering plants are first used to verify the stocks, and later to supply the goods the customer has ordered.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
SAP AG 2003
Delivering Plant
Client
Company Code1000
Company Code3000
Plant 1100 Plant 1400 Plant 1200
000102
100012
220010
Plant 2200
n The plants from which the Sales department delivers the materials ordered (delivering plants) must be assigned to a sales organization and a distribution channel (distribution chain) in Customizing.
n By making the plant dependent on the distribution channel, you can differentiate further between plants within a sales organization for sales. This would allow the distribution channel "direct sales" for certain plants in a sales organization but not for others.
n One plant can be assigned to several distribution chains as the delivering plant. It can also be assigned to several sales organizations.
n It is also possible for the delivering plant of a distribution chain to belong to a different independent company in the corporate group (that is, the plant belongs to a different company code to the sales organization). This is called cross-company Sales. This topic is discussed in detail in training course LO925 Cross-Application Business Processes in SD and MM.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
SAP AG 1999
Enterprise Structures: Conclusion
You are now able to:
l Use organizational units in the SAP R/3 System to model the different areas at your company
l Set up enterprise structures by assigning them to organizational units
l Adjust the organizational structures to meet the legal and business requirements of your company
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution - Exercises
Unit: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Describe the structure of the IDES company for sales and distribution
• Set up your own enterprise structures for sales and distribution in the SAP System
You have joined the project team that is implementing the SAP System at your company.
As the employee responsible for sales, you need to familiarize yourself with the structure that has already been created and verify the settings.
You will expand the existing enterprise structure for your sales organization to include the new distribution channel e-Sales.
The required settings are located in the Implementation Guide (IMG) under the IMG node for Enterprise Structure. You can find some of the organizational data in Sales and Distribution and other data in the Financial Accounting and Logistics - General areas.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 17
DATA SHEET
Enterprise Structures Organizational units Key Description
Sales organization 1000
Distribution channel • Final customer sales
• Service
Division Cross-division
Sales office •
•
•
Sales group •
•
•
•
Company code
Plant • 1200
•
•
•
(C) SAP AG SCM605 18
1-1 The project team has already modeled your company’s organizational structure in the R/3 System. Familiarize yourself with the organizational units that have been set up to model your company’s organizational structure. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.
1-1-1 What is the description of your sales organization 1000? Which currency is used to update the statistics? What is the address?
Description: _________________________________ Statistics currency: Name: _________________________________ Address: _________________________________ _________________________________
1-1-2 Which distribution channels have been defined for Final customer sale and Service?
Distr. channel: _________________________________ Distribution channel: _________________________________
1-1-3 Which division has been created for cross-division sales?
Division: _________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 19
1-2 Familiarize yourself with the enterprise structures that are relevant for sales that have been configured as organizational structures. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.
1-2-1 The organizational units determined above have been used to configure various sales areas for your sales organization 1000. Which sales areas have been defined? Sales organization Distribution
channel Division
Sales area 1000 Sales area 1000
1-2-2 Determine the sales offices responsible for managing sales in sales area 1000 / 10 / 00.
Sales office: _________________________________ Sales office: _________________________________ Sales office: _________________________________
1-2-3 Add some examples of the sales groups assigned to the sales offices listed above.
Office: _______________ Sales group: __________________ Sales group: __________________
Office: _______________ Sales group: __________________ Sales group: __________________
1-2-4 Which company code does your sales organization belong to?
Company code: _________________________________
Which currency is defined for this company code?
Currency: _________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 20
1-2-5 Enter the delivering plants that are assigned to sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10 in your data sheet.
Delivering plant: _________________________________ Delivering plant: _________________________________ Delivering plant: _________________________________ Delivering plant: _________________________________
2-1 Optional
To meet their goal of establishing new, modern sales possibilities, your management board has approved a project for establishing eSales as a new sales channel at your company. Management wants to be able to track the sales and revenues from these transactions separately, and pricing procedures that are different from all other sales processes must be possible.
Configure the new organizational units you need.
2-1-1 Define a new distribution channel for e-sales.
Please use the Define distribution channel function, NOT Copy, delete, check distribution channel.
Background:
The Define distribution channel function (only) creates a new distribution channel. The much more powerful function Copy, delete, check distribution channel allows you to copy all of the distribution channel-specific settings from the template. You can also perform this synchronization later. This function is extremely useful and efficient in projects. In this course, however, you are responsible for performing the corresponding Customizing steps yourself.
Distr. channel: Y = 70 + ## (for group 19, for example: Y = 70 + 19 = 89) Description: eSales ##
2-1-2 An independent staff is being trained to process the orders received through e-Sales. Organizationally, these employees will be grouped together in a sales office. Set up the new sales office Ze## eOffice ## for this group. Use sales office 1000 as a template.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 21
2-2 Optional
Enhance the existing sales organization structures by integrating new organizational units.
2-2-1 Assign the new distribution channel to your sales organization 1000.
2-2-2 Build new sales areas with your sales organization, Z000, the new distribution channel, and divisions 00, 01, and 07.
2-2-3 Make sure that deliveries for orders from the new sales areas can take place at your distribution centers at the Hamburg, Dresden, and Stuttgart plants.
2-2-4 Configure Customizing so that orders entered for your new sales area, Z000 / Y / 00, can be assigned to your new sales office ZE## eOffice ## as the responsible internal organizational unit.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 22
Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution - Solutions
Unit: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution
DATA SHEET
Enterprise Structures Organizational units Key Description
Sales organization 1000 Germany Frankfurt
Distribution channel • 10 Final customer sales
• 14 Service
Division 00 Cross-division
Sales office • 1000 Office Hamburg
• 1010 Office Frankfurt
• 1030 Office Stuttgart
Sales group (example) • 1000 / 100 Gr. F1 Mr. Anton
• 1000 / 101 Gr. F2 Mr. Mayer
• 1010 / 110 Gr. H1 Mr. Thomas
• 1030 / 130 Gr. S1 Ms. Chmiel
Company code 1000 IDES AG 1000
Plant • 1200
• 1000
• 1100
• 1300
Dresden
Hamburg
Berlin
Frankfurt
(C) SAP AG SCM605 23
1-1 Go to the SAP Reference IMG and navigate to the definition of the organizational units. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.
à Tools à Accelerated SAP à Customizing à Edit Project
Choose SAP Reference IMG
à Enterprise structure à Definition
1-1-1 Find the definition of sales organization 1000.
à Sales and Distribution à Define, copy, delete, check sales organization . .
Choose Define Sales Organization.
Description: Germany Frankfurt Statistics currency: Euro
Choose Address.
Name: IDES Deutschland - Frankfurt Address: Friedrich-Naumann-Straße 16 60486 Frankfurt/M
1-1-2 Find the description of the distribution channels.
à Sales and Distribution à Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel
Choose Define distribution channel.
Distr. channel: 10 Final customer sale Distribution channel: 14 Service
1-1-3 Find the description of the division.
à Logistics – General à Define, copy, delete, check division
Choose Define division.
Division: 00 Cross-division
(C) SAP AG SCM605 24
1-2 Navigate to the assignment of the organizational units to enterprise structures. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.
à Enterprise structure à Assignment
1-2-1 Go to the assignment of sales areas.
à Sales and Distribution à Set up sales area Sales organization Distribution
channel Division
Sales area 1000 10 00 Sales area 1000 14 00
1-2-2 Go to the assignment of sales offices.
à Sales and Distribution à Assign sales office to sales area
Sales office: 1000 Office Frankfurt Sales office: 1010 Office Hamburg Sales office: 1030 Office Stuttgart
1-2-3 Go to the assignment of sales groups.
à Sales and Distribution à Assign sales group to sales office
Office: 1000 Sales group: 100 Gr. F1 Mr. Anton Sales group: 101 Gr. F2 Mr. Mayer Sales group: 103 Gr. F3 Mr. Ludwig
Office: 1010 Sales group: 110 Gr. H1 Mr. Thomas Sales group: Gr. H2 Mr. Thiel
Office: 1030 Sales group: 130 Gr. S1 Ms. Chmiel Sales group: 131 Gr. S2 Mr. Kaysers
1-2-4 Go to the assignment of the company codes.
à Sales and Distribution à Assign sales organization to company code
Company code: 1000 IDES AG
Go to the definition of the company codes.
à Enterprise structure à Definition à Financial Accounting à Define, copy, delete, check company code . .
Choose Edit company code data.
Currency: Euro
1-2-5 Go to the assignment of plants in Sales and Distribution.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 25
à Enterprise structure à Assignment à Sales and Distribution à Assign sales organization - distribution channel - plant
Delivering plant: 1000 Hamburg Delivering plant: 1100 Berlin Delivering plant: 1200 Dresden Delivering plant: 1300 Frankfurt
2-1 Optional
Create new organizational units for Sales and Distribution.
2-1-1 Create a new distribution channel Y eSales ## (Y=70 + ##).
à Enterprise structure à Definition à Sales and Distribution à Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel
Choose Define distribution channel .
Distr. channel: Y = 70 + ## (for group 19, for example: Y = 70 + 19 = 89) Description: eSales ##
2-1-2 Set up the new sales office Ze## eOffice ##.
à Sales and Distribution à Maintain sales office
Select sales office 1000 and choose Copy as...
2-2 Optional
Assign the new organizational units to the existing structure.
2-2-1 Assign the new distribution channel to your sales organization 1000.
à Enterprise structure à Assignment à Sales and Distribution à Assign distribution channel to sales organization
2-2-2 Set up the new sales areas.
à Sales and Distribution à Set up sales area
2-2-3 Assign delivering plants to the new distribution chain.
à Sales and Distribution à Assign sales organization - distribution channel - plant
2-2-4 Assign your new sales office Ze## eOffice ## to a sales area.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 26
à Sales and Distribution à Assign sales office to sales area
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Sales Order Processing
l Processing sales orders
l Ways of creating sales orders
l Help creating sales orders
Unit Contents:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Sales Order Processing: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
l Find and use the tools and help for entering and processing sales orders
l Determine the origin of document data from various sources, like the material master, the customer master, or customizing
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Sales Order Processing: Course Overview Diagram
XYZ/99M1 -?-
§
0.00ORORLFLFF2F2
7. Data flow8. Special business
transactions
9. Incomp-leteness
12. Materialdetermination
2. Organizationalunits
4. Sales document type
11. Outlineagreements
13. Freegoods
6. Schedule line cat.
5. Item category
1. Introduction
3. Sales order processing
10. Partnerdetermination
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
Sales Order Processing: Business Scenario
l Your company, IDES Inc., has been using the SAP R/3 SD module successfully for years.
l You now want to further optimize the processes of entering and processing sales orders.
l To do this, you want to extract the document data as default values and fixed values from the master data and other sources.
l You want to take full advantage of the aids and tools that are available for creating documents.
l It is your responsibility to familiarize yourself with the techniques for creating and processing documents in the R/3 System.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 1999
Overview: Sources for Document Data
...
...
...
IMGCustomizing
Master data Customer masterMaterial masterConditions. . .
Existingdocumentdata
Information sources are:
Hard-codedcontrols
form XY_001.sy-subrc = 4.check: FeldX ne FeldY.sy-subrc = 0.
endform.ProgramProgram
ABAP/4 Editor
Order
Example: Sales document type: delivery block, shipping condition
e.g., determination of shipping point
Example: The delivering plant at item level as the basis for determining the shipping point
Example: Customer master: Plant, shipping condition
Example: Material master: Plant, loading group
Example: Weighting the different sources of information during plant determination
During data input for sales documents, the system supports you by analyzing various sources of information. The aim is to make creating documents easier by using default values or fixed reference data. Possible sources of information are:
n Master data: The system reads the master data defined for a customer, a material, or a pricing condition. For example, the specific terms of payment for a customer can be found. The sales information from a material master can serve as the source of the delivering plant.
n Existing document data: Document data that has already been entered or dete rmined automatically by the system can be used to enter additional documents data. For example, the delivering plant is used - along with other information - to determine the shipping point.
n Customizing: Default values for creating documents can be defined in Customizing. For example, you can set a default value for the delivery date or configure a delivery or billing block in the sales document type. You can also define strategies in Customizing for determining document information based on combinations of several criteria (for example: determining the shipping point through a combination of delivering plant, loading group, and shipping condition).
n Hard-coded controls: Hard-coded controls can be used to weight the different sources of information (example: proposing plants automatically).
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 1999
Sales Order Entry - Deriving the Sales Area
Order
Sold-to party:C1 Smith Inc.
Sales area:1000 10 00
Item:M1 Material 1
Ship-to party:S1 Smith Inc.
Customer master
Smith Inc.C1
n Each sales order is assigned to a unique sales area (sales organization, distribution channel, division). n When you enter a sales order you don't need to specify the sales area immediately. If you don't, the
system automatically derives the sales area from the sold-to party. n If there is master data for the sold-to party in several sales areas, a selection screen appears where
you can choose the sales area you require. Note: You can also create the master record for a new sold-to party from within the document creation
transaction.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 1999
Proposing Order Data from Master Data
Customer master
Business partnersPricingTax determinationDelivery schedulingPaymentsOutput
Material master
Pricing Tax determinationWeights / volumesAvailability checksDelivery scheduling Delivery controlsPlants
Master data
Conditions
Master data
OutputMaster data
Texts
Master data
Customer-material info
Item
10
20
30
Material
M1
M2
M3
Quantity
10
20
15
Order
Sold-to party: C1Ship-to party: S1
n It is advisable to store as much data as possible in master records in the R/3 System. This will save you time during order entry and help you to avoid incorrect entries.
n You can enter different types of master data in the R/3 System, such as information on business partners, materials, customer/material, item proposals, bills of material, prices, discounts and rebates, taxes, freight, output and texts. . The system will frequently access this data during order processing.
n In the order overview, you can create items for the ordering party by entering customer-specific material numbers.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 1999
Business Partners from the Customer Master
Bill-to party Payer
Ship-to partySold-to party
Customer master
n The essential business partners for a sales transaction are the sold-to party, ship-to party, payer and bill-to party. These business partners play various roles (called partner functions) in the business process.
n You can maintain a customer master record for each partner. There is a suitable entry screen for each type of business partner.
n When you enter a sales document, you can also enter the ship-to party instead of the sold-to party. The system then determines the sold-to party from the ship-to party. � If there is exactly one sold-to party for the ship-to party, the system can do this automatically. � If there are several possible sold-to parties for the ship-to party, the system displays a selection
screen with the possible alternatives. � If a sold-to party cannot be determined, the system issues an error message in the status bar. � A message also tells you if you entered a ship-to party in the sold-to party field inadvertently. The
system then continues to process the data as if you had entered the ship-to party in the ship-to party field.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
SAP AG 1999
Proposing Order Data from the Customer Master
Terms of payment Terms of payment Credit limit checkCredit limit check
OrderSold-to party:
Ship-to party:
Payer:
Bill-to party:
Item
.
.
Material
.
.
Quantity
.
.
Customer master C1
PricingPricingIncotermsIncoterms
Shipping conditionsShipping conditions
Customer master S1
ShipShip--to addressto addressGoods receiving hoursGoods receiving hoursTaxTax
Customer master E1
Billing address
Customer master R1
C1
S1
R1
E1
n The business data in a sales document is taken from the master data records for the different business partners.
n Because the ship-to party can be in a different place to the sold-to party, the delivery address and tax information are taken from the ship-to party's master record.
n Because the payer is responsible for paying your receivables, the payment conditions in the document come from the payer's master record.
n The bill-to party contains the address to which the invoice should be sent. This address could be different from that of the payer.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
SAP AG 1999
Business Data
Order 2HEADERPayment cond.: ZB01Incoterms : FOB
Order 1
Different data at itemlevel not possible
Changes possible, as separatebusiness data is allowed atitem level
HEADERPayment cond.: ZB01Incoterms: FOB
Copy CopyItem 10Payment cond.: ZB01Incoterms: FOB
Item 20Payment cond.: ZB01Incoterms: FOB
Item 10Payment cond.: ZB01Incoterms: FOB
Item 20Payment cond.: ZB01
ZB02Incoterms: FOB EXW
n You can define business data (such as payment conditions, Incoterms) at the document header or for each item.
n You can decide in Customizing for the item category whether the business data at item level can differ to the business data at header level. You define this option separately for each item category. This allows you to create documents containing both items in which the business data must be identical to the sales document header and items that allow different business data.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
SAP AG 1999
Proposing Plants Automatically
Delivering plant: 1100
Sold-to party: C2Ship-to party: S1
Item Material Quantity Plant10 M1 10 110020 M2 10 1100
Sold-to party: C3Ship-to party: S2
Item Material Quantity Plant10 M1 10 110020 M2 10 1200
Customer-material infoC1 M1 Cust.mat. PC-100
Sold-to party: C1Ship-to party: S1
Customer materialPC-100
Item
10
Quantity
10
Plant
1400
Material master M1
Customer master S1
Delivering plant: 1400
Delivering plant: 1000
Material master M2
Delivering plant: 1200
n The plant is an integral part of Logistics. It assumes the role of a delivering plant in SD. n When you enter an item to be delivered, the R/3 System attempts to determine a delivering plant
automatically from the master data. If the search is successful, the results are copied to the document item. You can change this plant manually.
n During its search, the system checks several master data records: � First, it checks whether it can propose a delivering plant from an entry in the customer-material
info record. � If the customer-material info record doesn't contain a plant, or if there aren't any customer-material
info records, the system checks the customer master record for the ship-to party. � If this search is unsuccessful, the delivering plant is determined from the material master record.
If there isn't a plant in the material master record, the system will be unable to determine a valid plant. And if the system is unable to determine a valid plant, it cannot determine any other document data, either. For example, it would not be possible to automatically determine the shipping point. Furthermore, no availability check is possible, and no delivery can be created.
Note: If necessary, you can use a USEREXIT to enhance the standard system.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
SAP AG 1999
Sales Summary
Sales Summary for Customer 5264
Address
IDES Inc.Neurottstr. 16D-69190 Walldorf
Quick info
Last order 5638Max. credit limit used 68%Orders with billing block 2
Key figures
Annual sales 200 000 000 UNIEmployees 604 Legal status Limited liability company
. . .
Info blocks
l Address
l Key figures
l Quick info
l Contact persons
l Last SD documents
l Document key figures
l Pricing
l . . .
n The sales summary helps to create documents by displaying a variety of relevant information about the customer. This information is available through a pushbutton at any time during document processing.
n The information in the sales summary is grouped into info blocks on various topics. You can configure the info block views according to topic yourself in Customizing.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
SAP AG 2003
Overview: Changing Sales Documents
Fast Changes in Document
Order
Concurrent change to several items
Fast Changes in Several Documents
Order
Plant 20001200
Order
Plant 20001200
Order
Plant 20001200
Order
Plant 20001200
Changes using document list
Item 10Item 20. . .
Mat-12Mat-10. . .
Plant 1200Plant 1200. . . . . .
20002000. . .
n Different options are available for changing document data: n Fast change in document: The fast change function allows you to change several - or all - items of
a document at the same time (for example: changing the delivering plant or delivery date, settings blocks, rejections)
n Changing several documents: You can use the document list to change the plant, currency, materials, and pricing in several documents at the same time. The new mass change tool for documents in Release 4.6 supports comprehensive changes to the selected sales documents.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
SAP AG 1999
Blocks
OrderBlocks
Header Delivery block/billing block
Item 10 Billing block
Item 20Sched. line 1Sched. line 2 Deliv. block
User sets and removes blocks
Defining blocks in Customizing
...
...
...
IMG
n In sales orders, you can block the transactions: � For shipping � For billing
n You can set a billing block in the document header and in the individual items. You can customize the delivery block to configure the detailed effects of that block in shipping processing. For example, you can generally prevent the creation of a delivery, or allow processing of the delivery and picking but block the goods issue, and so on (see Appendix).
n You can set a billing block in the document header and in the individual items. n You can enter reasons for rejection for one or more items. In copying control you can stop this item
from being copied into subsequent documents. n The "Fast change" function enables you to simultaneously block all the items that you have selected
in the document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
SAP AG 2003
Rejections
Item 20 M3 30 PC
Item 10 M1 10 PC
Order
Quotation
Item 10 M1 10 PC
Item 20 M2 20 PCReason for rejection: Too expensive
Item 30 M3 30 PC
Sold-To Party: C1
Sold-To Party: C1
x
n You can enter a reason for rejection for one or several items. You can create a suitable copying requirement in copying control to prevent these items from being copied into subsequent documents.
n For example, if a customer doesn't want some of the items in a quotation, you can assign a reason for rejection to those items. This gives the items the status completed. The business transaction can thus be concluded without deleting the item.
n Reasons for rejection also allow you to verify what your customers think of your products during a certain time period. The marketing department can use these results as an important planning tool for their strategies in the next sales period.
n The "Fast change" function allows you to reject several or all items of a document at the same time. A button is also available for rejecting all the items in a document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
SAP AG 1999
Re-determined Data
n Customer master
n Customer-material info record
n Texts
n Free Goods
n Prices
n Output
n Plant and shipping point
Unchanged Data
n Sales area
n Sales office and sales group
n Availability and product allocation
n Batches
No changes if there are:
nn StatusStatus--relevant preceding relevant preceding documentsdocuments
nn Subsequent documentsSubsequent documents
Change Sold-to Party in Sales Document
n At times, it can be beneficial to start entering individual items before you enter the sold-to party, especially when phone sales are involved.
n Because a sold-to party is always required to create a sales document, a default value must be set in the sold-to party field. You can do this with your user-specific parameters or - depending on the sales document type - with a transaction variant.
n The incompleteness log of the sales document ensures that the person responsible replaces the default customer value with the actual sold-to party.
n To do this, the default sold-to party must be flagged as such in the customer master (activate customer type Default SP).
n When the sold-to party is changed, the changed value runs through the same checks as the initial entry. As a result, a variety of data is re-determined - such as texts, prices, and delivering plant.
n You can also change the ship-to party later on the overview screen. However, the system does not re-determine the sold-to party in this case.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 17
SAP AG 1999
Sales Order Processing: Summary
You are now able to:
l Find and use the tools and help for entering and processing sales orders
l Determine the origin of document data from various sources, like the material master, the customer master, or customizing
(C) SAP AG SCM605 18
Sales Order Processing - Exercises
Unit: Sales Order Processing
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Use the different tools for processing orders
• Explain how master data is proposed in sales documents
The order clerk only has to enter a few items when creating sales documents. The majority of the information is copied from the master data.
1-1 Create a standard order for product T-ATC## (1 unit) with purchase order number ##LO605-OR03.
1-1-1 Do not specify the sales area (delete any values that default). The ship-to party is T-S62F##.
1-1-2 Which sold-to party is determined by the system? Sold-To Party: _________________________________
1-1-3 Which sales area is automatically determined by the system? Sales area: _________________________________ Where does the system find this information? ______________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 19
1-2 Your customer T-S62A## places an order with you. They want the delivery to take place in 2 weeks. The purchase order number is ##LO605-OR04.
1-2-1 Enter the first item for material T-ATC## (quantity: 5 units). You offer the following terms of payment to your customer for this item: 14 days 3%, 30 days 2%, 45 days net. Terms of payment: _________________________________
1-2-2 Enter another item with material T-ATD## (20 units). This item has different terms of payment: 20 days 2%, 30 days net. This material should also be delivered to another address. Change the ship-to party of this item to your customer T-S62B##. Terms of payment: _________________________________
1-2-3 Deliver the order on the delivery date requested by your customer. What message appears in the log? ______________________________________________________
If necessary, set the selection date for the delivery to two weeks from today.
1-2-4 Which delivering plant is determined by the system? Delivering plant for item 10: _____________________________ Delivering plant for item 20: _____________________________
1-2-5 Which master records does the system use to extract this information? ______________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 20
1-3 Your plant 1000 contains stock for material T-ATD##. This is the material that should be delivered from this plant, when customer T-S62A## orders it.
1-3-1 Create a customer-material information record so that this material is always taken from plant 1000 for this customer.
1-3-2 The customer manages this material with number PC-M-## and description PC-Monitor ##. Enter these details in the customer-material info record.
1-3-3 You receive an order from customer T-S62A## with purchase order number ##LO605-OR05. The order consists of 12 monitors, which the customer manages under material number PC-M-##. The customer wants to receive the delivery in two weeks. Create the sales order.
Can you fulfill the customer’s requested delivery date?
Which plant will be used to supply the delivery?
You can use the Ordering Party overview screen to enter items with the customer’s purchase order numbers.
Your customer tells you that she would like to add to her purchase order number ##LO605-TA05.
1-4-1 Enter another item with 16 units of material T-ATE##. The delivery date is in two week’s time.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 21
1-5 Optional
Your customer can get the first order item of document ##LO605-OR05 for a better price somewhere else, so they reject this item.
1-5-1 Cancel this item by entering the relevant reason for rejection (save the order before going onto the next step.
1-5-2 Display the delivery and rejection status for the order.
Overall processing: ______________ Header - Delivery status: ______________ Header - Rejection status: ______________
Item 10 Overall processing: ______________ Item - Delivery status: ______________ Header - Rejection status: ______________
Item 20 Overall processing: ______________ Item - Delivery status: ______________ Header - Rejection status: ______________
1-5-3 Create a delivery for this order with shipping point 1200. The delivery date is two weeks from today. Decrease the quantity of the first item in the delivery by half. Save the delivery. Check the status of the order.
Overall processing: ______________ Header - Delivery status: ______________
Item 20 Overall processing: ______________ Item - Delivery status: ______________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 22
Sales Order Processing - Solutions
Unit: Sales Order Processing
1-1 Enter the standard order.
à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Order à Create
1-1-1 Order type: OR Ship-to party: T-S62F## Purchase order number: ##LO605-OR03
1-1-2 Sold-To Party: T-S62E## HiTech AG
1-1-3 Sales area: 1000 / 10 / 00
1000 / 10 / 00 In the first step, the system determines the sold-to party from the ship-to party. The sales area is then determined from the sold-to party’s master record.
1-2 Enter the standard order.
1-2-1 Enter the item.
Order type: OR Sold-to party: T-S62A## Purchase order number: ##LO605-OR04
Material: T-ATC## (5 units) Terms of payment: ZB01
1-2-2 Enter another item.
Material: T-ATD## (20 units) Terms of payment: ZB03 Ship-to party : T-S62B##
(C) SAP AG SCM605 23
1-2-3 Deliver the order on the delivery date requested by your customer.
Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Shipping and transportation à Outbound Delivery à Create à Single document à With reference to sales order
Shipping point: 1200 Selection date: Two weeks from today.
Choose Error log.
“Item 000020: delivery split because the partners are different.”
The cause is that the two order items are to be delivered to different ship-to parties, which means each must be on a separate delivery.
1-2-4 Delivering plant for item 10: 1200 Delivering plant for item 20: 1200
1-2-5 Which master records does the system use to extract this information?
From the materials master record
1-3 Save the agreement with your customer as a master record.
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Agreements
1-3-1 Create a customer-material information record.
à Customer-material informationà Create
Customer: T-S62A## Sales organization: 1000 Distribution channel: 10 Material: T-ATD## Delivering plant: 1000
1-3-2 Complete the customer number and name for the material.
Customer material: PC-M-## Customer description: PC Monitor ##
1-3-3 Enter the standard order.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 24
Sold-To Party: T-S62A## Purchase order number: ##LO605-OR05 Requested delivery date: Two weeks from today
Customer material: PC-M-## (12 units)
The requested delivery date can be met. Delivery will take place from plant 1000, as agreed.
1-4 Add to the order with purchase order number ##LO605-TA05.
1-4-1 Material: T-ATE## (16 units) Delivery date: Two weeks from today
1-5 Optional
Change the order with purchase order number ##LO605-OR05.
1-5-1 Reject the first item.
Reason for rejection: Too expensive
1-5-2 Display the delivery and rejection status for the order.
Choose Status overview and then expand all.
Overall processing: Being processed Header - Delivery status: Not delivered Header - Rejection status: Partially rejected
Item 10 Overall processing: Completed Item - Delivery status: Not delivered Item - Rejection status: Fully rejected
Item 20 Overall processing: Open Item - Delivery status: Not delivered Item - Rejection status: Nothing rejected
1-5-3 Create the delivery.
Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Shipping and transportation à Outbound Delivery à Create à Single document à With reference to sales order
Shipping point: 1200 Selection date: Two weeks from today.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 25
Delivery quantity of item 10: 8 units.
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order à Display
Choose Status overview and then expand all.
Overall processing: Being processed Header - Delivery status: Partially delivered
Item 20 Overall processing: Being processed Item - Delivery status: Partially delivered
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types
l Document types in Sales
l Sales document functions
l Sales document structure and data
l System settings for sales documents
l Assigning organizational units
Unit Contents:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Sales Document Type: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
l Identify the elements that control the sales documents
l Name examples of different sales document types used for different business processes
l Explain what the sales document type does
l Create Customizing settings for the sales document type
l Restrict the validity of sales document types to sales areas
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Sales Document Type: Course Overview Diagram
XYZ/99M1 -?-
§
0.00ORORLFLFF2F2
7. Data flow8. Special business
transactions
9. Incomp-leteness
12. Materialdetermination
2. Organizationalunits
4. Sales document type
11. Outlineagreements
13. Freegoods
6. Schedule line cat.
5. Item category
1. Introduction
3. Sales order processing
10. Partnerdetermination
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
Sales Document Type: Business Scenario
l Your company, IDES Inc., has been using the SAP R/3 SD module successfully for years.
l Company management has now decided to expand the company's sales activities. In the future, customers should also be able to place orders at trade fairs.
l It must be possible to control and evaluate the new sales activities separately from all existing activities.
l It is your responsibility to configure a separate sales document types for trade fair sales.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 1999
Controlling Business Processes in Sales
HeaderHeader
Item Item
Schedule lineSchedule line
Subsequent Subsequent documentdocument
Sales document type
Sales document type
Item categoryItem category
Schedule line category
Schedule line category
DocumentDocument
Control parameters
Control parameters
Control parameters
Copyingcontrol
Copyingcontrol
Copyingcontrol
n Sales processes are controlled by Customizing for sales documents. n Customizing for sales documents can be done at header, item or schedule line level, depending on
the structure of the document. The instruments for control are the sales document type, item category and schedule line category.
n You need to make settings in Customizing so that the item and schedule line categories are determined automatically in the sales document.
n To complete the setup of a business process in your system, you need to configure the system for forwarding data from the sales document to subsequent documents according to your needs. You can do this in copying control.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 1999
Basic Functions
Material req. planning
No materials planning
No inventory management
Schedule line categoriesSchedule line categories
Standard item
Free-of-charge item
Text item
Item categoriesItem categories
Sales document typesSales document types
Standard sales order
Inquiry
Quotation
Basic functionsBasic functions
• Partner determination• Pricing• Incompleteness• Free Goods• Determining materials• Requirements transfer• Delivery scheduling• Output• Text determination• Credit management• ...
n You need to configure several general sales functions (basic functions) for the sales documents. These include:
Partner determination Pricing Output determination Text determination Material determination Credit management Incompleteness checks Delivery scheduling etc. You can fine-tune these settings at each level within the sales document.
n The sales document is not completely configured until you have processed all of the necessary basic functions.
n Examples: For pricing you can set up your own pricing procedure for a sales document type. First you configure the sales document type and pricing procedure separately. Then you assign the procedure to the sales document type. You can also create default output types for each sales document type. To do this, you assign the relevant output determination procedure to the sales document type in Customizing for output.
n You can use different functions for different sales document types. For example, pricing but not inventory updates are needed to create an inquiry.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 1999
Examples of Sales Document Types
RE = ReturnsCR = Credit memo requestSDF= Subsequent free-of-charge
deliveryDR = Debit memo request
OR = Standard orderRO = Rush orderCS = Cash salesCF = Consignment fill-upDF = Delivery free-of-charge
NMS= Quantity contractSA = Scheduling agreementRC = Rental contractWK1= General value contract
IN = InquiryQT = Quotation
PrePre--Sales PhaseSales Phase Outline AgreementsOutline Agreements
Sales PhaseSales Phase ComplaintsComplaints
n Different sales document types are delivered with the system to represent the different business processes. These provide you with examples of how to use sales document types.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 1999
Functions in the Sales Document Type
Sales Sales document document
typetype
Mandatory reference
Number assignment
Enhancement for contracts
ChecksDivisionOpen quotations/contractsInfo record
Default valuesDateBilling type/delivery typeBlocks
• Partner determination• Pricing• Incompleteness• Free goods• Determining materials• Output• ...
Assigning basic functions
Assigning basic functions
n In Customizing for the sales document type, you configure the settings that influence the sales process, such as the sales document category, delivery and billing blocks or the document types for subsequent deliveries and billing documents.
n You can also save default values that appear when you create a document. You can overwrite these values at different levels of the document to match particular procedures, such as the customer's requested delivery date or certain basic requirements for contracts.
n In addition, you can activate various checks such as messages about open quotations or outline agreements, searches for customer-material info records, or credit limit checks. Note that activating checks can affect system performance.
n Note: � Adding a new sales document type to sales processing is time-consuming because many of the
entries in Customizing depend on the sales document type. To avoid any difficulties, you should generate a new sales document type by copying an existing one with similar functions. This document type should be one from the SAP standard system or should already have been tested by your company. � When you copy the document type, both the fields and the dependent entries are copied. Once the
system has copied the document, it automatically generates a log that you can save for documentation purposes.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
SAP AG 1999
Order Types Permitted for Sales Areas
Sales organization1000 Standard order
Inquiry
Free-of-charge deliveries
Returns
Distribution channel10
Division00
Sales document typesSales document typesSales areaSales area
Permitted?Permitted?
n You can use Customizing to define which sales document types are valid in which: � Sales organizations � Distribution channels � Divisions
n This means you can limit the validity of your sales document types at the level of sales organization, distribution channel and division.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
SAP AG 1999
Sales Document Type: Summary
You are now able to:
l Identify the elements that control the sales documents
l Name examples of different sales document types used for different business processes
l Explain what the sales document type does
l Create Customizing settings for the sales document type
l Restrict the validity of sales document types to sales areas
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types - Exercises
Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Control sales document types in Customizing
• Implement your own sales processes with new sales document types
You want to control and evaluate your sales activities separately for trade fairs. To do this, you use a different sales document type, which you set up in Customizing to meet your requirements. You limit the use of that sales document type for the sales areas defined.
1-1 Your new trade fair order should meet the following requirements:
• Description: Fair##-order
• The number assignment should be internal – you should not be able to assign numbers externally.
• Item numbering should have an increment of 100.
• Order entry should begin with the Item overview screen.
• Checking open quotations or contracts is not necessary.
• When billing documents are created, the system should re-run pricing. Note: In the standard system, billing type F1 is configured such that pricing is re-run automatically when you create a new billing document.
• Your company wants the default requested delivery date to be automatically proposed with a lead time of 2 days.
• Pricing should be based on the current date.
• The system should automatically propose the current date as the purchase order date.
Change order type ZA##, which has been generated as a copy of the standard order (order type OR) to meet these requirements.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
1-2 Check your settings by creating an order with the new sales document type ZA## and two items.
1-2-1 Your customer T-S62B## orders 10 units of material T-ATB## at a trade fair. Create a trade fair order (sales order type ZA##) The purchase order number is ##LO605-ZA##01.
1-2-2 Check the fields containing the document number of the order, the requested delivery date, the pricing date, the order date, the overview screen, and the item numbering for this order.
2-1 Optional
Compare the two sales document types Standard order and Rush order.
2-1-1 What are the differences between these two types?
____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
2-1-2 Change sales document type ZA## so that it is like a Rush order.
Note: Check the settings for immediate delivery; shipping conditions and lead time in days.
2-1-3 Create an order with order type ZA## in sales area 1000 / 10 / 00 for customer T-S62A## and your material T-ATA## (10 units). The purchase order number is ##LO605-ZA##03.
2-1-4 View the document flow to determine whether the delivery was created.
Outbound Delivery number: ____________________________________
2-1-5 Undo your changes to order type ZA## when you are finished!
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types - Solutions
Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types
1-1 Change sales document type ZA##.
à Tools à Accelerated SAP à Customizing à Project editing à SAP Reference IMG
à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Sales documents à Sales document header à Define sales document types
Select document type ZA##. Choose Details.
Description: Fair##-order Number range external assignment: Blank Item number increment: 100 FCODE for overview screen: UER2 Quotation messages: Blank Outline agreement messages: Blank Delivery-related billing type: F1 Order-related billing type: F1 Lead time in days: 2 Proposed pricing date: Blank Proposed purchase order date: Activate
1-2 Verify the settings in the sales order.
1-2-1 Create the sales order.
1-2-2 Check the Customizing of your sales document type ZA##.
Fair##-order: Blank (Number is assigned internally when you save) Requested delivery date: Two days from today Pricing date: Today Purchase order date: Today Overview screen: Item overview Item number: 100
2-1 Compare the document types in Customizing.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Sales documents à Sales document header à Define sales document types
2-1-1 The following fields in the rush order are different from those in the standard order (Note: these are the critical fields that are different – there are others):
Imm. delivery: Activated Shipping condition: 10 immediately Lead time in days: Blank
2-1-2 Change the document type.
2-1-3 Create the order and save.
2-1-4 Display the order and choose Document flow.
2-1-5 Undo the changes to the document type.
Imm. delivery: Blank Shipping condition: Blank Lead time in days: 2
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category
l Item categories in the sales document
l Functions of the item category
l Controlling sales document items
l Determining the item category automatically in sales documents
l Using item categories to control bills of material in sales documents
Unit Contents:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Item Category: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
l Identify and explain the important control parameters for item categories
l Create a new item category
l Configure the system so that item categories are automatically assigned to a sales document type
l Control settings for bills of material in the sales document
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Item Category: Course Overview Diagram
XYZ/99M1 -?-
§
0.00ORORLFLFF2F2
7. Data flow8. Special business
transactions
9. Incomp-leteness
12. Materialdetermination
2. Organizationalunits
4. Sales document type
11. Outlineagreements
13. Freegoods
6. Schedule line cat.
5. Item category
1. Introduction
3. Sales order processing
10. Partnerdetermination
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
Item Category: Business Scenario
l Company management has now decided to expand the company's sales activities.
l In future, you want to use BOMs to sell certain products. In addition, customers should also be able to place orders at trade fairs.
l To control these processes separately, you want to be able to influence document control at the item level.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 1999
Examples of Item Categories
REN = Standard item in returns
G2TX= Text item in credit memo request
KLN = Free-of-charge item
TAD = Service in standard order
BVNN= Free-of-charge item in cash sales
KEN = Standard item in consignment issue
KMN = Standard item in quantity contract
WVN= Standard item inmaintenance contract
WKN= Item in value contract
AFN = Standard item in InquiryAGTX= Text item in quotation
PrePre--Sales PhaseSales Phase Outline AgreementsOutline Agreements
Sales PhaseSales Phase ComplaintsComplaints
n Different item categories are delivered with the system to support the different business processes. You can use them as examples or as templates for creating your own item categories.
n The item category is defined with a four-digit key. These keys are copied automatically from the original German keys and are not translated. The first two characters provide a clue to the sales document type that was originally designed for these item categories. The last two characters indicate the use of the item category, such as:
AFTX Sales document type: IN Usage: TEXT TAD Sales document type: OR Item category group: LEIS KMN Sales document type: NMS Item category group: NORM
n You can decide if you would like to keep the standard keys or define your own so that the abbreviation refers to your sales document types and how the category is configured.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 1999
Item Category Functions
Item categoryItem category
Separatebusiness data
Schedule lines permitted
Billing relevance
Delivery relevance
Pricing
Assigning basic functions
Assigning basic functions
• Partner determination• Text determination• Incompleteness• . . .
Completion rule
BOMs
n The item category controls what the item does in the sales document and in any later processing for that business transaction.
n The essential characteristics of an item category decide: Whether business data in the item can be different to that of the document header Whether pricing applies to the item Whether and how an item is billed Whether the item refers to an item or whether it is just a text item Which incompleteness log is used to check the item data
n You can change the settings for the item categories defined in the standard system. You can also define new item categories. To do this, you should always copy item categories that already exist and have been tested, then change them to meet your requirements.
n The delivery relevance indicator is only for items without schedule lines. You could indicate that a text item was relevant to delivery, for example, so that the system copies this item from the sales order into the delivery document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 1999
Controlling the Items in the Sales Document
Standard item in quotation
Standard item in quotation
Standard item in order
Standard item in order
Free-of-charge item in order
Free-of-charge item in order
PricingSchedule lines allowedNot relevant for billing
AGN
TAN
TANN
Pricing Schedule lines allowed Relevant for billing
No pricingSchedule lines allowedNot relevant for billing
Text item forinquiry
Text item forinquiry AFTX
No pricingSchedule lines allowedNot relevant for billing
Function Example
The diagram contains examples with settings as they are provided in the standard R/3 System. n Every item in a sales document is controlled through its item category. This enables you to
Use different item categories in different sales document types, Realize different business processes for each item in the sales document.
n You can configure the functions of the item categories according to your requirements. For example: You do not need price determination for the text item in the inquiry (item category AFTX), but
you want to enter delivery quantities and delivery dates, and you therefore allow schedule lines. You want schedule lines for a free-of-charge item in the sales order (item category TANN) but
you do not want to carry out pricing for this item or transfer it to billing.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 2003
Subitems
Item 30
Item 20Higher-level item 10
Item 10
Header
Examples ofSubitems
Order
Free goods
BOM components
Service
n You can assign an item to a higher-level item if, for example, a customer receives free goods for ordering a certain quantity of your product.
n Example: Item 10: M1 100 units 1000 Euro Item 20: M2 10 units Free of charge For ordering 100 pieces of item 10, the customer receives 10 units free of charge. To display this, you enter item 10 in the higher-level item field for item 20.
n This simple form of supplying free goods is supplemented with the automatic determination of free goods (see the unit "Free goods").
n Other examples for using sub-items include the explosion of BOMs or service items in sales documents.
n Note : Alternative items can also be recorded in quotations and Inquiries in addition to sub-items. Alternative items are treated differently from sub-items; for example, alternative items are not included in the net value of the document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
SAP AG 1999
Assignment: Item Category to Sales Document Type
l System proposall Alternatives
Item category groupItem category group
Sales document typeSales document type
Item category of upper-level itemItem category of upper-level item
Item category(ies)Item category(ies)
Item usageItem usage
Material master
View:Sales: Sales org. 2
ABAP/4 EditorABAP/4 Editor
form XY_001.
sy-subrc = 4.
check: FeldX ne FeldY.
sy-subrc = 0.
endform.ProgramProgram
Sales document
Item
Sales document
Header
n Item categories are assigned to sales document types. n The purpose of this assignment is to: � Configure the system to propose an item category when you create an order � Define alternative item categories to the system proposal
n This assignment is influenced by: � The item category group from the material master record.
The item category group allows you to group different materials that behave in a similar way during Sales and Distribution processes, for example. You can also define new item category groups if needed. � Item usage, which in certain cases is set internally in the program.
The system uses TEXT if the user enters an item in the inquiry or quotation by entering data in the "Description" field without specifying a material number. FREE is used for controlling the free goods item. � Item category of a higher-level item (in the case of a sub-item)
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
SAP AG 1999
BOMs: Example: Computer
Monitor CPU KeyboardMouse Floppy drive
Screen
Computer
Casing
n A computer consists of several components. In turn, each of these components is constructed from several individual parts.
n You can store this structure in the system as a bill of material. All the items in the bill of material (BOM) that you want to control in the sales document must be flagged as relevant for sales. (Please note: the items in a bill of material are controlled differently than the item categories in a sales document). If you create a BOM material with BOM usage 5 (SD), all the items in the bill of material will be automatically flagged as relevant to sales.
n By making the appropriate settings in Customizing for the item categories in the sales document, you can copy the components in the bill of material to a sales order. To process the sales document you only need to enter the material number of the BOM.
n The BOM appears in the sales document as a structure with main and sub-items. The system explodes the BOMs in the sales order by automatically generating sub-items for the components.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
SAP AG 1999
Exploding Bills of Material in Sales Documents
Item category of sub-item:
à Not priced
TAQ
TAE
Material master:R-1001
Sales: Sales org. 2
Item category group: ERLA
Material master:R-1001
Item category group: LUMF
Sales: Sales org. 2
Alternative control of BOM
Sales document
Item category of main item:
à Pricing
Item category of sub-item:
à Pricing
Sales document
Item category of main item:
à Not priced
TAP
TAN
n The individual item categories control what a bill of material can do in a sales document. In Customizing you define and assign item categories for the main and sub-items in the BOM in the sales document.
n A specific item category group assigned to the material master record of the main item defines which item categories are assigned to the main item.
n To determine how far the BOM should be exploded in the sales document, you need to define the extent of the structure of the item category for the main item.
n When you determine the sub-items, the system also needs to know the item category of the higher-level item.
n In Customizing for item categories, you control which item are relevant to pricing and how you want to implement requirements transfer.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
SAP AG 1999
Item Category: Summary
You are now able to:
l Identify and explain the important control parameters for item categories
l Create a new item category
l Configure the system so that item categories are automatically assigned to a sales document type
l Control settings for bills of material in the sales document
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category - Exercises
Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category
Topic: Item Categories and Item Category Determination
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Configure the Customizing of item categories
• Explain and control the automatic determination of item categories.
Items in sales documents frequently have to be controlled differently, such as for pricing or billing.
This applies to items
• That pass through several sales documents during the course of the transaction
• Within an individual sales document
Item categories are determined automatically.
1-1 Your customer tells you that she would like to add to her purchase order number ##LO605-TA05.
1-1-1 Enter another item with 16 units of material T-ATE##. The delivery date is in two week’s time.
1-1-2 You have also agreed to give your customer a free goods item of 1 unit of material T-ATE##. Enter the corresponding sub- item.
1-1-3 Is this item included in the net value of the order? ____________________________________
1-1-4 What are the item categories in this order? Item 10: _________________________________
Item 20: _________________________________
Item 30: _________________________________
Item 40: _________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
1-2 Complete the following table:
Item category
Description Business data
Schedule lines
permitted
Item relev. for
delivery
Pricing Structure scope
TAN Standard item
TANN Free-of-charge item
TAP Extent delivered
TAQ Extent delivered
TATX Text item
TAD Service
TAE Not priced
1-3 Why is the item category in the order automatically proposed by the system? Look for the relevant table in Customizing. What are the key fields for automatically determining the item categories?
1st key field: _________________________________
2nd key field: _________________________________
3rd key field: _________________________________
4th key field: _________________________________
1-4 Complete the following table:
Sales
Document Type
Item category
group
Item usage
Higher-level item category
Default item category
Manual item category
Manual item category
IN DIEN
OR TEXT
OR NORM
OR NORM TAN
OR NORM TAP
OR NORM TAQ
ZA## ERLA
ZA## ERLA TAQ
ZA## LUMF
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
ZA## LUMF TAP
1-5 Optional Your customer T-S62A## places a standard order with purchase order number ##LO605-OR06 in sales area 1000 / 10 / 00.
1-5-1 Enter the standard order with a requested delivery date of one week from today. Enter the following positions:
Material: T-ATA## (5 units) Material: T-ZSA## (3 hours)
Which item category groups are assigned to the materials?
Item 10: _________________________________ Item 20: _________________________________
1-5-2 Which item categories are used? In Customizing, check which of the item categories are relevant for delivery and pricing.
Item Category
Pricing Schedule lines
permitted
Item relev. for delivery
Item 10
Item 20
1-5-3 Deliver the order with purchase order number ##LO605-OR06. Delivery items are generated for which order items? _________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
Exercises
Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category
Topic: Bills of Material (BOMs) in the Sales Document
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Create master records for sales BOMs
• Control BOMs in sales documents
You often have to explode BOMs in sales documents. In the process, you have to determine, for example, at which level price determination and/or transfer of requirements is performed.
2-1 You want your material T-FUA## in plant: 1200 to appear as a bill of material in your sales documents.
2-1-1 Enter a sales bill of material for this material (use Sales and distribution 5) with component T-ATA##, T-ATF## and T-ATG## (one unit each). Configure the bill of material items as stock items (L).
2-1-2 Create an order for your customer T-S62A## and your material T-FUA## (10 units). The purchase order number is ##LO605-OR07. Does the system explode the bill of material? ____________________________________________________________ Why or why not? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 17
2-1-3 In future, you only want to determine the prices for the finished product. You want to list the individual components of the finished product for informational purposes. Change the material master for your material T-FUA## so that pricing only takes place at the main item level.
2-1-4 Check the effects of your change in the sales document by creating a new order for customer T-S62A## ordering material T-FUA## (10 units). Does the system explode the bill of material? Which items affect the net value of the order? PO number: ##LO605-TA08
2-1-5 Change your material T-FUA## so that pricing only takes place at the subitem level.
2-1-6 Check the effects of your change in the sales document by creating a new order for customer T-S62A## ordering material T-FUA## (10 units). Does the system explode the bill of material? Which items affect the net value of the order? PO number: ##LO605-TA09
(C) SAP AG SCM605 18
-Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category - Solutions
Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category
Topic: Item Categories and Item Category Determination
1-1 Add to the order with purchase order number ##LO605-TA05.
1-1-1 Material: T-ATE## (16 units) Delivery date: Two weeks from today
1-1-2 Enter the sub- item.
Material: T-ATE## (1 unit) Higher- level item: 20
1-1-3 Is this item included in the net value of the order?
Select the free goods item and choose Item conditions.
No. The net value of the item is zero.
1-1-4 Determine the item categories.
à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order à Display
Item 10: TAN Item 20: TAN Item 30: TAN Item 40: TANN
(C) SAP AG SCM605 19
1-2 Check the definitions of the respective item categories.
à IMG à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Sales Documents à Sales Document Item à Define item categories
Item
Category Description Business
data Schedule
lines permitted
Item relev. for delivery
Pricing Structure scope
TAN Standard item x x - X -
TANN Free-of-charge item
x x - B -
TAP Extent delivered - x - - A
TAQ Extent delivered x x X A
TATX Text item - - x - -
TAD Service x x - X -
TAE Not priced - x - - -
1-3 Check the assignment of each item category.
à IMG à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Sales Documents à Sales Document Item à Assign item categories
1st key field: SaTu Sales Doc. Type
2nd key field: ItCGr Item category group
3rd key field: Usage Item usage
4th key field: HlevItCa Item category of upper-level item
1-4 Sales
Document Type
Item category
group
Item usage
Higher-level item category
Default item category
Manual item category
Manual item category
IN DIEN AFX
OR TEXT AGTX
OR NORM TAN TAP TAQ OR NORM TAN TANN
OR NORM TAP TAN
OR NORM TAQ TAE
ZA## ERLA TAQ
ZA## ERLA TAQ TAE
ZA## LUMF TAP
(C) SAP AG SCM605 20
ZA## LUMF TAP TAN
1-5 Create the sales order.
1-5-1 Navigate from the order to the material master record Environment à Display material, and then select tab page “Sales” in the material master: SalesOrg2, Item 10: Item category group: NORM Item 20: Item Category Group: LEIS
1-5-2 Item
Category Pricing Schedule
lines permitted
Item relev. for delivery
Item 10 TAN X X -
Item 20 TAD X X -
1-5-3 A delivery item is generated for the standard item.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 21
Solutions
Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category
Topic: Bills of Material (BOMs) in the Sales Document
2-1 Enter and work with a bill of material.
2-1-1 Enter the bill of material into an order.
à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Master data à BOMs à BOM à Material BOM à Create
Plant: 1200 Dresden Usage: 5 Sales and Distribution
BOM item category: L Stock item
2-1-2 Enter the bill of material into an order.
The BOM is not exploded.
à IMG à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Sales Documents à Sales Document Item à Define item categories
The item category of the main item in the BOM, TAN, does not support the explosion of BOMs in the sales document (the ”Structure scope” field is blank).
2-1-3 Change the item category group in the material master of the main item in the BOM.
à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Master data à Products à Material à Trading goods à Change
Choose Sales: Sales org. data 2
Sales organization: 1000 Distribution channel: 10
Item Category Group: ERLA
(C) SAP AG SCM605 22
2-1-4 Create an order.
The BOM is exploded. Pricing is only performed for the main item, as a result, the net value of the order is calculated exclusively from this item.
2-1-5 Change the item category group in the material master of the main item in the BOM.
à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Master data à Products à Material à Trading goods à Change
Choose Sales: Sales org. data 2
Sales organization: 1000 Distribution channel: 10
Item Category Group: LUMF
2-1-6 Create an order.
The BOM is exploded. Pricing is only performed for the sub-item, as a result, the net value of the order is calculated exclusively from the sub-items.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Controlling Sales Documents with Schedule Line Categories
l Schedule line categories in sales documents
l Functions of schedule line category
l Controlling the schedule line category
l Automatically determining the schedule line category
Unit Contents:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Schedule Line Category: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
l Identify and explain the most important control parameters for schedule line categories
l Create a new schedule line category
l Configure your settings so that schedule line categories are automatically assigned to each sales document item
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Schedule line category: Course Overview Diagram
XYZ/99M1 -?-
§
0,--ORORLFLFF2F2
7. Data flow8. Special Business
Transactions
9. Incompletion
12. Materialdetermination
2. Organizationalunits
4. Sales document type
11. Outlineagreements
13. Freegoods
6. Schedule line cat.
5. Item category
1. Introduction
3. Sales Order Processing
10. Partnerdetermination
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
Schedule Line Category: Business Scenario
l Changes that affect the entire logistics process are taking place at your company, IDES AG.
l One of the interfaces to the other logistics modules represents the schedule lines of the sales documents.
l As a result, you have to find out about the control parameters and the automatic determination of the schedule line categories.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 1999
Examples of Schedule Line Categories
DN = Schedule line in returns without MRP
D0 = Consignment returns
CP = Order schedule line with MRP
C0 = Consignment issuewithout availabilitycheck
CV = Scheduling agreement with deterministic MRP
AT = Inquiry schedule lineBN = Schedule line in quotation
without MRP
PrePre--Sales PhaseSales Phase Outline AgreementsOutline Agreements
Sales PhaseSales Phase ComplaintsComplaints
n Different schedule line categories are delivered with the system to provide different control options for the items throughout the sales process. You can use them as is or as templates for creating your own schedule line categories.
n The schedule line category is defined with a two-character key. The standard system already includes keys that often indicate the usage of the schedule line category.
The first character indicates the sales process in which the schedule line category is used. A = Inquiry B = Quotation C = Order D = Returns The second character in the key indicates what happens to the schedule line within logistics. T = No inventory management X = No inventory management with goods issue N = No materials planning P = Material requirements planning V = Consumption-based planning
You can decide if you would like to keep the standard keys or define your own so that the abbreviation refers to your sales document types and how the category is configured.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 1999
Schedule Line Category
Delivery relevance
Purchasing
Requirements transfer
Goods movement
Availability check
Schedule line Schedule line categorycategory • Incompleteness
• . . .
Assigning basic functions
Assigning basic functions
n Schedule lines contain delivery dates and quantities as well as information about the requirements transfer and inventory management. They are a prerequisite for delivering materials.
n In Customizing for item categories, you decide if you will allow schedule lines for the item. You can assign schedule line categories to each item category. By defining a schedule line category, you determine which schedule lines are actually relevant for delivery. You must activate the relevant to delivery indicator if you want the goods to be physically delivered.
n In the schedule line category you set the movement type to control which changes to quantities and values are posted to inventory accounting. Inventory management is responsible for maintaining the movement types. Movement types have been configured for all processes in the SAP standard system. Many of the movement types relevant to SD are between 601 and 699.
n You can deactivate requirements transfer and availability checks at the schedule line level. n A prerequisite for the purchase order is typically a purchase requisition and this document can be
automatically generated from the sales document. To do this, you need to configure the purchase order type as well as item and account assignment categories in the purchase order.
n If you activate a delivery block in the schedule line category, this block is automatically set at the schedule line level in the sales document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 1999
Controlling Schedule Lines in Sales Documents
BN
CP
DN
Not rel. for deliveryNo requirements trans.No movement type
Relevant for deliveryRequirements transferMovement type 601
Relevant for deliveryNo requirements trans.Movement type 651
Function Example
Schedule line in Schedule line in quotationquotation
Requirements planningRequirements planningin orderin order
Schedule line in Schedule line in returnsreturns
n Examples in the R/3 standard system. n Schedule lines in quotations are not relevant for delivery. The requirements transfer is inactive in the
schedule line category. Goods movements are not necessary in your warehouses so no movement type is needed..
n Since schedule lines from category CP generate delivery items in the sales order, the relevant to delivery indicator is activated. The requirements transfer is active in the schedule line category. Complete Customizing for requirements transfer (for example, for requirements planning) requires you to define and assign the requirements class. The goods movement is controlled by movement type 601. With this movement type, when the goods issue for the delivery is posted, the quantity shipped is taken from unrestricted use stocks.
n If you want a returns delivery to follow a return order, you need a schedule line category that is relevant for delivery. In this case, transferring requirements is not necessary. Movement type 651 enables you to make sure that goods receipt goes to blocked stock returns.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 1999
Assignment: Schedule Line Category to Item Category
l System proposall Alternatives
Material master
View: MRP 1
Sales documentItem
Item
Item categoryItem category
MRP typeMRP type
Schedule line Schedule line category(ies)category(ies)
n Schedule line categories are assigned to item categories. n The purpose of this assignment is to: � Configure the system to propose a schedule line category automatically when you create an order � Determine the schedule line categories that the user can choose instead of the system proposal
n The assignment is influenced by the materials requirements planning (MRP) type in the material master record.
n The system takes two steps to automatically determine the schedule line category: � First it tries to determine the schedule line category using the key combination of item category
and MRP type. � If no schedule line category is found, the system searches for the key combination of item category
/ no MRP type.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
SAP AG 1999
Schedule line category: Summary
You are now able to:
l Identify and explain the most important control parameters for schedule line categories
l Create a new schedule line category
l Configure your settings so that schedule line categories are automatically assigned to each sales document item
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines - Exercises
Unit: Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Configure the Customizing of schedule line categories
• Explain and control the automatic determination of schedule line categories
The schedule lines contain delivery quantities and dates for a sales document item. Later on in the business process, a schedule line can either create an item in a delivery or it can transfer the data to a subsequent sales document. You use the schedule line category to decide, for example, whether the system should check availability or transfer requirements for that schedule line.
1-1 Customer T-S62A## requests a quotation for 10 units of material T-ATA##.
1-1-1 Enter the quotation with purchase order number ##LO605-OT02. The quotation should be valid for a month.
1-1-2 On what date has the delivery of the schedule line been confirmed?
Confirmed date: _______________________________________
1-1-3 Which item and schedule line categories have been determined?
Item category: _______________________________________
Schedule line category: _______________________________________
1-1-4 How does the schedule line category control this schedule line?
Item relev. for delivery _______________________________________
Requirements transfer: _______________________________________
Availability check: _______________________________________
1-1-5 Try to deliver the quotation (change the delivery selection date to the schedule line confirmed date).
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
Can you do it? ____________________________________________________________
1-2 Complete the following table:
Schedule Line
Category
Description Availability Transfer of requirement
s
Item relev. for delivery
Movement type
AT Inquiry schedule line
BN No MRP
BP Deterministic MRP
CN No MRP
CP Deterministic MRP
DN Returns
1-3 After a comprehensive check of your quotation, customer T-S62A## places an order with you.
1-3-1 Enter a standard order with reference to the quotation created in previous exercise (order will use purchase order number ##LO605-OR10). Copy the quotation completely into the order.
1-3-2 On what date has the delivery of the schedule line been confirmed? Confirmed date: _______________________________________
1-3-3 Which item and schedule line categories have been determined?
Item category: _______________________________________
Schedule line category: _______________________________________
1-3-4 How does the schedule line category control this schedule line?
Item relev. for delivery _______________________________________
Movement type: _______________________________________
Requirements transfer: _______________________________________
Availability check: _______________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
1-3-5 Try to deliver the order. Can you do it?
____________________________________________________________
1-3-6 Optional Which order screens contain information about the movement type and delivery blocks linked to schedule lines? Movement type: _________________________________ Delivery block: _______________________________________
1-4 Complete the following table:
Item Category MRP type Proposed schedule line
category
Manual schedule line
category
Manual schedule line
category
ItCa Typ SchLD MSLCa MSLCa
AFN
AFN ND
AGN
TAN
TAN VM
TANN ND
REN
KBN
KEN
1-5 Optional Which schedule line category does the sys tem determine for an item in item category TAN if the MRP type for the material is P3 (MRP fixing type -3-)? Schedule line category: _________________________________ Which search key does the system use? Key: _______________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines - Solutions
Unit: Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines
1-1 Create the quotation
à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Create
1-1-1 Quotation type: QT PO number: ##LO605-AG02 Valid to: one month from today
1-1-2 Select the item and choose Schedule lines for item.
1-1-3 Item category: AGN Standard item Schedule line category: CS Verbrg. MRP
1-1-4 Navigate to the definition of the schedule line category.
IMG → Sales and distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Define schedule line categories
Item relev. for delivery deactivated Req./Assembly deactivated Availability check deactivated
1-1-5 No. The schedule lines of the quotation are not relevant for delivery.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
1-2 Check the definition of the schedule line categories.
IMG → Sales and distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Define schedule line categories
Schedule Line
Category
Description Availability Transfer of requirement
s
Item relev. for delivery
Movement type
AT Inquiry schedule line - - - -
BN No MRP - - - -
BP Deterministic MRP x x - -
CN No MRP - - x 601
CP Deterministic MRP x x x 601
DN Returns - - x 651
1-3 Create the sales order.
1-3-1 Choose Create with reference and enter the number of the quotation.
1-3-2 Select the item and choose Schedule lines for item.
1-3-3 Item category: TAN Schedule line category: CV
1-3-4 Item rel. for del. x Movement type 601 GD goods issue: delivery Req./Assembly x Availability check x
1-3-5 Call the order and choose Sales document à Deliver.
Yes.
1-3-6 Optional
Select the item and choose Schedule lines for item. Select the item again and choose Schedule line details or press the Procurement or Shipping pushbutton.
The movement type is located on the Procurement tab page.
The delivery block is located on the Shipping tab page.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
1-4 Check the assignment of the schedule line categories.
IMG → Sales and distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Assign schedule line categories
Item Category MRP type Proposed
schedule line category
Manual schedule line
category
Manual schedule line
category
ItCa Typ SchLD MSLCa MSLCa
AFN AT BP
AFN ND AT
AGN BN BP
TAN CP
TAN VM CV
TANN ND CN
REN DN
KBN E1 E0
KEN CR CO
1-5 Optional
Schedule line category: CP
Key: Item category: TAN MRP type: Blank
No explicit entries are maintained for the item category and the MRP type in the assignment table.
In this case, the system checks whether an entry without a definition of the MRP type exists for the involved item category.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 2003
Data Flow
l Create with reference
l Document flow
l Copying control and copying requirements
l Updating the reference status
Unit Contents:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 2003
Data Flow: Unit Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
l Use document flow
l Understand and influence how data is passed between sales documents at header, item and schedule line level
l Use the completion rule for item categories to control documents created with reference
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 2003
Data Flow: Course Overview Diagram
XYZ/99M1 -?-
§
0,--ORORLFLFCRCR
8. Special BusinessTransactions
9. Incomp-leteness
12. MaterialDetermination
2. OrganizationalUnits
4. Sales Document Type
11. OutlineAgreements
13. FreeGoods
6. Schedule Line Category
5. Item Category
1. Introduction
3. Sales Order Processing
10. PartnerDetermination
7. Data Flow
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 2003
Data Flow: Business Scenario
l The different sales processes at your company, IDES AG, need to differentiate how they copy data from a preceding document to a subsequent document
l The status information in the preceding document also has to be controlled differently, depending on the process
l You need to model the processes as document flow lists
l It is your responsibility to figure out how the document flow, copying control, and status update work
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 2003
Create with Reference: Dialog
Create With Reference X
Copy
Inquiry Billing Doc.Order ContractQuotation Sched. Agrmnt
Quotation
Requested delivery date
PO Number
Search Criteria
Sold-to party
Search
Item selection
200000546
n You can create a sales document with reference to a preceding document from both the initial screen and during document processing; the process is controlled using a uniform dialog box.
n The dialog box contains the six tab pages for Inquiry‚ Quotation, Order, Contract, Scheduling Agreement and Billing Document, from which you can choose one. The default tab page that appears when you first call up the screen has been determined by the system depending on the sales document category and the Mandatory Reference field.
n The system then determines the document number of the required reference document. n When you choose Copy, the system copies the reference document completely and if you choose
Item Selection you can select certain items and change the quantities before they are copied (see next slides).
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 2003
Create with Reference: Item Selection (1)
Item102030
MaterialM1M2M3
Quantity4050
100
Deadline04/0101.04.01.04.
Price100.-150.-120.-
SD Document: 5376Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 2003
Create with Reference: Item Selection (2)
Item102030
MaterialM1M2M3
Quantity4050
100
X
X60
Copying Control
Selection List of Reference Doc.
SD Document: 5376Sold-To Party: 1000Business DataCreate With Reference
Document 5376
Copy Selection List
Dialog
Deadline04/0101.04.01.04.
Price100.-150.-120.-
SD Document: 5376Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data
Item102030
MaterialM1M2M3
Quantity4050
100
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 2003
Create with Reference: Item Selection (3)
Item102030
MaterialM1M2M3
Quantity4050
100
X
X60
SD Document: 5435Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data
Item1030
MaterialM1M3
Quantity4060
Deadline06/2020.06.
Price100.-120.-
Copying Control
Selection List of Reference Doc.
SD Document: 5376Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data
Copy
Dialog
Deadline04/0101.04.01.04.
Price100.-150.-120.-
SD Document: 5376Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data Create With Reference
Document 5376
Selection List
Item102030
MaterialM1M2M3
Quantity4050
100
n You can create sales documents with reference to documents that already exist. n In the process, you can specify a different requested delivery date for the new document. This date is
set at the header level and for all referenced items in the new document. n You can use the Selection List button to select one or more items in the referenced document and
change the order quantities according to your customer's requirements. This allows you to copy partial quantities or all the items and quantities in the referenced document directly to the new one. Alternatively, you can also copy all the items and quantities directly from the preceding document.
n You can create with reference from both the initial screen and during document entry. This allows you to group several quotations for a customer together in a single order.
n You can create with reference for inquiries, quotations, sales orders, contracts, scheduling agreements and billing documents. To create with reference, you must first configure the corresponding copying controls. Please note that you should only configure these controls for logical business processes.
n Example: A free-of-charge subsequent delivery based on a sales order is appropriate An order based on a free-of-charge subsequent delivery is not appropriate
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
SAP AG 2003
Create with Reference: Copy
Item102030
MaterialM1M2M3
Quantity4050
100
Deadline04/0101.04.01.04.
Price100.-150.-120.-
SD Document:Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data
Copy Selection list
Dialog
Deadline04/0101.04.01.04.
Price100.-150.-120.-
SD Document: 5376Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data Create With Reference
Document 5376Item102030
MaterialM1M2M3
Quantity4050
100
n When you create with reference using the "Copy" pushbutton in the dialog box, the full quantities of all items are copied to the subsequent document. This does not apply to items in the reference document that have been partially or fully completed.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
SAP AG 2003
Completion Rule and Reference Status
Inquiry
Item10
MaterialM1
Quantity10
Status: Fully referenced
Sold-To Party: C1
Quotation
Item10
MaterialM1
Quantity8
Status: Part. referenced
Sold-To Party: C1
Order
Item10
MaterialM1
Quantity6
Sold-To Party: C1
Copying Control:Update doc. flow x
Copying Control:Update doc. flow x
Item Category
AFNCompletion rule AItem complete after first reference
AFNCompletion rule AItem complete after first reference
AGNCompletion rule BItem complete when full quantity is ref.
AGNCompletion rule BItem complete when full quantity is ref.
TAN
n When you Create with reference to preceding documents, you frequently have to update the information about referred quantities or values. To do this, you have to check the Document flow update field at item level in copying control.
n In addition, if you want to restrict the reference to an item (for example, only until the full quantity in the preceding document has been referenced), set the appropriate Completion rule in the item category. The status of each item in the preceding document is updated separately, depending on the completion rule of the item category.
n Examples � Completion rule A:
An inquiry item is given "Completed" status as soon as it has been referred to in a quotation. This applies even if only part of the quantity in the quotation is copied. � Completion rule B:
A quotation item is not given "Completed" status until the complete quantity has been copied to the subsequent order. If only some of the quantity is copied, the quotation item is given the status "Partially referred". This allows you to continue creating orders from this item until the total quantity has been used up. � There are no additional completion rules for items in contracts.
n If you enter a reason for rejection, the item receives "Completed" status.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
SAP AG 2003
Document Flow - List
Document Flow of Quotation
Quotation. Order. . Delivery. . . Invoice. . Returns. . . Returns delivery. . . . Returns credit memo
Returns
Order Delivery Invoice
ReturnsDelivery
Returns Credit Memo
Quotation
..
.
n A sales process is made up of the sequence of individual process steps recorded as documents. This process chain is stored in the document flow.
n Document flows are updated for the overall document and for individual items. n You can view all of the documents within the document flow in a list. n In many cases, you can branch directly to the display of a document and then return to the document
flow. n In the status overview that can be displayed for each document in the document flow, you can
quickly find detailed information about the current status of the sales and distribution process. n Example: � Order -> Delivery status � Delivery -> Picking status
-> Billing status � Billing doc. -> Posting status
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
SAP AG 2003
Copying Control in SD
Quotation (QT)
Standard Order (OR)
Delivery (LF)
Billing Document (F2)
allowed
allowed
allowed
n In copying control you determine which document types can be copied to another document type. Examples of this show how you can create a: � Sales document type from a sales doc. type e.g. Standard order (OR) <- Quotation (QT) � Sales document type from a billing doc. type e.g. Credit memo request (G2) <- Invoice (F2) � Delivery type from a sales document type e.g. Delivery (DL) <- Standard order (OR) � Billing doc. type from a sales doc. type e.g. Credit memo (G2) <- Credit memo request (G2) � Billing document type from a delivery type e.g. Invoice (F1) <- Delivery (DF) � Billing doc. type from a billing doc. type e.g. Invoice cancellation (S1) <- Invoice (F1)
n You determine the details of the copying procedure in copying control.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
SAP AG 2003
Copying Control for Sales Documents
SourceSource
Sched. Line
Item
HeaderIN Inquiry
QT Quotation
Sales Doc. Type
For IN -> QT
For IN -> QT
AFN Standard item
AFNN FOC item
Item Category
BP Mat. planning
Schedule Line Cat.
TargetTarget
QT Quotation
OR Stndrd order
Sales Doc. Type
AGN Standard item
AGNN FOC item
Item Category
Schedule Line Cat.
AT Inquiry sched. line
n You set up copying control for header, item and schedule line level to match the structure of your sales document.
n To control the copying procedure, at each level you create: � Data transfer routines
These routines control how fields are copied from the preceding document. � Copying requirements
Here you define requirements that are checked when you create a document with reference. If these requirements are not met in a particular case, the system issues a warning or error message and if necessary, terminates processing. � Switches
There are switches for setting specific controls for each transaction. For example, you can activate or deactivate the transfer of item numbers from the preceding document at the header level for sales documents.
n If you enter an invalid value or do not enter a target value at the item and schedule line level, the system determines the target from the assignment of the item or schedule line categories. Any value you enter must exist in the item or schedule line category assignment (as an alternative).
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
SAP AG 2003
Copying Requirements
General dataHeader business dataPartner
Schedule line data
Quotation Standard Order
General dataHeader business dataPartner
General item dataItem business dataPartnerConditions
Schedule line data
If customer isthe same
If item is not
completed(completely copied
or rejected)
If open quantity
is greater than zero
General item dataItem business dataPartnerConditions
n You can store copying requirements at every level in copying control. Copying requirements contain the specific requirements for each business process and can be stored at every level. The reference document can only be created if all these requirements have been met.
n Examples of copying requirements that have been included in the SAP standard system are: � Header level
Copying requirement 001 checks, for instance, whether the sold-to party and the sales area in the source and target document are the same. � Item level
Copying requirement 301 checks, for instance, whether the item that is to be used as a copy has a reason for rejection or completed status. � Schedule line level
Copying requirement 501 ensures that only schedule lines with an open quantity greater than zero are copied.
n Note : Routines and requirements are written in ABAP/4 code and can be processed in Customizing in SD under System Modifications. Here you should check whether the existing objects are suitable. Normally you can adjust your system quickly by copying the objects in the standard system and deleting or adding lines of code to them.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
SAP AG 2003
Data Flow: Summary
You are now able to:
l Use document flow
l Understand and influence how data is passed on between sales documents at header, item and schedule line level
l Use the completion rule for item categories to control documents with reference
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
Data Flow - Exercises
Unit: Data Flow
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Control how the completion status is updated between documents
• Track the data transfer between sales documents and adapt it to meet the specific requirements of a business process
In each step within a business process, you formulate requirements that become prerequisites for the next step.
For example, you can define that a quotation can only lead to an order when
• the sold-to party is identical in both documents or when
• the customer’s order lies within the validity period of the quotation
1-1 You receive a request for quotation (Inquiry number ##LO605-IN02) from customer T-S62A##. The customer requests 50 units each of materials T-ATA## and T-ATB##. The requested delivery date is the first day of the next month.
1-1-1 Enter the inquiry.
1-1-2 What is the status of the items in the inquiry?
Total processing Rejection status Reference status
Header
Item 10
Item 20
(C) SAP AG SCM605 17
1-1-3 After checking with your MRP controller, you know that you can offer the customer the requested quantity for material T-ATA##, but only 30 units of material T-ATB##. Enter a corresponding quotation (purchase number ##LO605-OT03) with reference to the inquiry. The quotation is valid for a month.
1-1-4 Which changes does the system make to the document status?
Total processing Rejection status Reference status
Inquiry
Header
Item 10
Item 20
Quotation
Header
Item 10
Item 20
1-1-5 Once your customer has checked the quotation, they order the first item with the complete quantity in the quotation, but initially only orders 20 units of the second item. Create the trade fair## order (purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##04).
1-1-6 Which changes are made to the status of the quotation?
Item
Total processing Rejection status Reference status
Header
Item 10
Item 20
1-1-7 Your customer then informs you that they don’t want the open quantity of item 20 in the quotation because the product is too expensive. Reject the item in the quotation and check the changes to the status.
Reason for rejection: _________________________________
Item
Total processing Rejection status Reference status
Header
Item 20
(C) SAP AG SCM605 18
1-2 Try to create another order with reference to the quotation.
1-2-1 Can you do it?
____________________________________________________________
Why or why not?
1-3 Optional
You decide in copying control whether the item numbers for the subsequent document should be copied from the preceding document.
1-3-1 Was the item numbering in the trade fair## order (purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##04) recalculated or taken from the quotation?
____________________________________________________________
1-3-2 Item numbering should be re-determined when you create an order for order type ZA## with reference to a quotation. Change the settings in copying control accordingly.
1-3-3 Create a quotation for customer T-S62A## that is valid for a month, with purchase order number ##LO605-OT04 and any two items. Enter an order, order type ZA##, with reference to this quotation (purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##05). Copy both items.
Check the item numbering in the quotation and the sales order.
Item numbers in quotation: _________________________________
Item numbers in order: _________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 19
Data Flow - Solutions
Unit: Data Flow
1-1 Try out the Create with reference function.
1-1-1 Create the inquiry and save the document.
à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Inquiry à Create
1-1-2 à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Inquiry à Display
Choose Status overview.
Total processing Rejection status Reference status
Header Open Nothing rejected Not referenced
Item 10 Open Nothing rejected Not referenced
Item 20 Open Nothing rejected Not referenced
1-1-3 Create the quotation.
à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Create
Choose Create with reference à Inquiry, enter the Inquiry number, choose Selection List, and reduce the quantity of the second item. Choose Copy.
1-1-4 à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Display
Choose Document flow, select one of the documents, and choose Status overview.
Total processing Rejection status Reference status
Inquiry
Header Completed Nothing rejected Fully referenced
Item 10 Completed Nothing rejected Fully referenced
Item 20 Completed Nothing rejected Fully referenced
Quotation
Header Open Nothing rejected Not referenced
Item 10 Open Nothing rejected Not referenced
Item 20 Open Nothing rejected Not referenced
(C) SAP AG SCM605 20
1-1-5 Create the trade fair## order.
à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Order à Create
Choose Create with reference à Quotation (tab), enter the quotation number, choose Selection List, and reduce the quantity of the second item. Choose Copy.
1-1-6 à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Display
Choose Status overview.
Item
Total processing Rejection status Reference status
Header Being processed Nothing rejected Partially referenced
Item 10 Completed Nothing rejected Fully referenced
Item 20 Being processed Nothing rejected Partially referenced
1-1-7 Choose Reason for rejection.
Reason for rejection: Too expensive
Item
Total processing Rejection status Reference status
Header Completed Partially rejected Partially referenced
Item 20 Completed Fully rejected Partially referenced
1-2 à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Order à Create
Choose Create with Reference à Quotation (tab)
1-2-1 You cannot create the quotation because it is already completed.
The system displays the following message: The reference has already been completely copied or rejected.
1-3 Check the Customizing of copying control for sales documents.
1-3-1 Compare the two documents.
The document numbers have been copied from the quotation. Otherwise, the item numbers would be generated in increments of 100.
1-3-2 à IMG à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Maintain copying control for sales documents
Choose Copying control: Sales document to sales document
Choose Change.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 21
Choose Position. Target: ZA## Source: OR
Select the entry and choose Details.
Deselect field ”Copy item number” and save.
1-3-3 Verify the settings in the process.
Choose Create with Reference à Quotation.
The document numbers are re-determined in the order, and item numbers are generated in increments of 100.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Special Business Transactions
l Cash Sales
l Rush deliveries
l Consignments
l Free-of-charge deliveries
Unit Contents:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Special Business Transactions: Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
l Explain the differences between cash sales and rush orders and their special features
l Explain how customer consignments are represented in Customizing for Sales
l Control free-of-charge deliveries and subsequent free-of-charge deliveries
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Special Business Transactions: Course Overview Diagram
XYZ/99M1 -?-
§
0,--ORORLFLFF2F2
7. Data Flow
9. Incompletion
12. Materialdetermination
2. Organizationalunits
4. Sales document type
11. Outlineagreements
13. Freegoods
6. Schedule line cat.
5. Item category
3. Sales Order Processing
10. Partnerdetermination
1. Introduction
8. Special Business Transactions
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
l Special business transactions occur regularly in the sales process at your company, IDES AG.
l You want to support these processes with the R/3 System.
l It is your responsibility to find out about the process variants that are modeled in the standard SAP System.
l In the process, you also want to find the control parameters for individual modifications.
Special Business Transactions: Business Scenario
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 1999
Rush Orders
Sold-to party: C1
Item Material Quantity10 M1 1020 M2 20
Created automatically
DF - DeliveryDocument no.: 8000 0070
Imm. delivery: XDelivery type: LF
Sales document typeRO - Rush order
RO - Rush orderDocument number: 2973
Sold-to party: C1
Item Material Quantity10 M1 1020 M2 20
n Rush orders and cash sales are sales document types that are used in the sale s from plant process or for when the customer needs to pick up their goods immediately from the warehouse.
n In the sales document type for immediate delivery, the immediate delivery switch and delivery type DF are configured. When you save a rush order, the system automatically creates a delivery of type DF.
n Once the goods have been withdrawn from the warehouse, picking and posting goods issue can begin.
n When you create the billing documents (for example in collective processing), the system prints the invoice papers and sends them to the customer.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 1999
Cash Sales
Imm. delivery: XDelivery type: CS
Sales doc. type: CS - Cash sale
RD03
CS - Cash saleDoc. number: 2310
Sold-to party: C1
Item1020
MaterialM1M4
Quantity2010
CS - DeliveryDoc. no.: 8000 0397
Sold-to party: C1
Item1020
MaterialM1M4
Quantity2010
CS - Billing doc.Doc. no.: 9000 0071
Sold-to party: C1
Item1020
MaterialM1M4
Quantity2010
Invoice
Laser printerPrinter
Invoiceno.:2310 x
Createdautomat.
n In the sales document type for cash sales, the immediate delivery switch and delivery type CS are configured. When you save the cash sales, the system automatically creates a delivery of type CS and prints a document that can be given to the customer as an invoice.
n You control the invoice papers with output type RD03, contained in the output determination procedure for order type CS.
n Once the goods have been withdrawn from the warehouse, picking and posting goods issue can begin.
n An order-related billing index is generated automatically. This updates the billing due list. Billing type CS is created while the billing due list is being processed. The system does not print invoices during billing.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 2003
CustomerIDES AG 1000
Consignment Stores
Customer Special Stock
Ownership ofOwnership of
IDES AG 1000IDES AG 1000
CF
Consigmnt Fill-Upþ Orderþ Deliveryþ Pickingþ Goods issue¨ Billing doc.
Consignmnt Issueþ Orderþ Delivery¨ Pickingþ Goods issueþ Billing doc.
Customer Usage
CI
Consignmnt Returnsþ Orderþ Inbound delivery¨ Pickingþ Goods receiptþ Billing doc.
CRCP
Consignmnt Pick-Upþ Orderþ Inbound delivery¨ Pickingþ Goods receipt¨ Billing doc.
Plant 1200 Dresden
Storage Location 0001
Consignment Processing
n In consignment processing, goods are delivered to the customer but remain the property of the company until they are actually used. An invoice is not created until the customer withdraws the goods from the consignment stock. The customer has the right to return consignment goods up until that point.
n You process consignment fill-up with order type CF. The goods issue sets up a special stock at the customer's. However, the goods remain in the valuated stocks of the delivering plant. This transaction isn't billed because the consignment stock remains the property of your company.
n Consignment issue is processed with order type CI. When goods are issued, both the customer special stock and the stock in the delivering plant are reduced. This transaction is relevant for billing.
n If the customer returns the goods, you can represent this with order type CP (consignment pick-up). This transaction credits the special customer stock during the goods issue. Like the consignment fill-up, this transaction is not relevant for billing.
n If you want to reverse a consignment issue, you can process this with document type CR (consignment return). The goods issue sets up the special stock at the customer's again. A credit memo is generated based on the consignment returns.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 1999
Deliveries Free of Charge and Subsequent Deliveries
LF DeliveryDF Deliveryfree-of-charge
SDF Subs. del.free-of-charge
RE Returns
Reason for rejection 11
M1 10 PC KLN M1 10 PC
M1 10 PC KLN M1 10 PCM1 10 PC REN
LF Delivery
n You create a delivery free-of-charge document, for example, when you want to send your customer a sample.
n You enter a subsequent delivery free-of-charge document, for example, when you need to deliver material for an order due to a complaint.
n Customizing for sales document type SDF determines that this transaction requires a preceding document. The relevant copying controls must be set up for all preceding documents that might be used, for example, copying control for SDF from a RE (returns order).
n By activating a delivery block in the sales document type, you ensure that delivery free-of-charge or subsequent delivery free-of-charge transactions are not released for delivery until they have been checked by the relevant employee. If the employee decides that the delivery should not take place, s/he can maintain a relevant reason for rejection in the sales document.
n In Customizing for item categories, you determine that items in sales document types DF and SDF are free of charge (for example with KLN or KLX). You can also decide what happens to these items with regard to pricing and billing.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
SAP AG 1999
Special Business Transactions: Summary
You are now able to:
l Explain the differences between cash sales and rush orders and their special features
l Explain how customer consignments are represented in Customizing for Sales
l Control free-of-charge deliveries and subsequent free-of-charge deliveries
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
Special Business Transactions - Exercises
Unit: Special Business Transactions
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Explain how complex business processes such as consignment processing are handled
• Explain how to control document types DF and SDF
Consignment processing offers your partners great advantages. Your customers manage the consignment stock themselves and can access the goods in the consignment warehouse at any time. They do not have to pay until the goods are issued and then only for the amount that has been issued.
There are two different cases that involve dispatching goods free of charge to the customers: The free of charge delivery of advertising materials and subsequent delivery within returns processing.
1-1 You agree to make material T-ATE## available immediately as consignment goods for customer T-S62A## .
Note: Check the stocks (plant 1200) in another session mode. You can call up the stock overview with the following menu path:
→ Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management → Environment → Stock → Stock overview
1-1-1 Check the consignment material stock. Unrestricted use: _________________________________ Customer Consignment: _________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
1-1-2 Send 100 units of the material to the customer’s consignment warehouse by entering a consignment fill-up (purchase order number ##LO605-CF01). Don’t forget to create a delivery and a transfer order and to post goods issue.
Notes:
1) Create the delivery directly from the order. Menu path: → Sales document → Deliver
2) Create a transfer order directly from the delivery. Menu path: Next functions → Create transfer request
3) Use the following settings: – Warehouse number: 12 Lean warehouse Dresden – Foreground/background: background – Adopt pick. quantity: 2 (copy picked quantity to delivery as delivery quantity and post GI)
1-1-3 Check the consignment material stock. Unrestricted use: _________________________________ Customer Consignment: _________________________________
1-1-4 Optional Try to create a billing document from the delivery document. Can you do it? _________________________________ Why or why not? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
1-1-5 The customer informs you that they have used 50 units of the material in the consignment warehouse. Enter a consignment issue (purchase order number ##LO605-CI01). Deliver the order and post goods issue.
Note: You can post the goods issue directly from the delivery, as the goods do not physically move in your warehouse (no transfer order required). Create the delivery directly from the order. Post the goods issue directly from the delivery.
Menu path: → Edit → Post goods issue
1-1-6 Check the consignment material stock.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
Unrestricted use: _________________________________ Customer Consignment: _________________________________
1-1-7 Optional
Bill the consignment issue. Can you do it? _________________________________ Why or why not? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
1-1-8 The customer informs you that they don’t need the remaining consignment goods. Enter a consignment pick-up (purchase order number ##LO605-CP01).
Deliver the order and post a goods issue.
1-1-9 Check the consignment material stock.
Unrestricted use: _________________________________ Customer Consignment: _________________________________
1-1-10 Optional
Bill the consignment pick-up. Can you do it? _________________________________ Why or why not? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
1-2 Optional
Display consignment fill-up and consignment issue with purchase order numbers ##LO605-CF01 and ##LO605-CI01. Which item and schedule line categories did the system determine?
Item Category Schedule Line Cat.
Consignment fill-up
Consignment issue
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
1-3 Optional
How and why are these schedule line categories different from each other? __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________
1-4 What are the differences in Customizing for sales document types DF and SDF? __________________________________________________________________ How can you ensure that the items in documents of this type are really delivered free of charge? __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
Special Business Transactions - Solutions
Unit: Special Business Transactions
1-1 You agree with your customer to make a material available immediately as a consignment good.
1-1-1 Check the consignment material stock.
à?Logistics à Materials management à Inventory management à Environment à Stock à Stock overview
Unrestricted use: 2000 Consignment stock: 0
1-1-2 Consignment fill-up
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order à Create Order type: CF Consignment fill-up
à Sales document à Deliver à Subsequent Function à Transfer order
1-1-3 Check the consignment material stock.
Unrestricted use: 1900 Consignment stock: 100
1-1-4 Optional
Try to create a billing document from the delivery document. Can you do it?
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Billing à Billing document à Create à Enter document number of delivery
No.
Log: The document is not relevant for billing. Cause: Billing has not been defined in Customizing for consignment fill-ups. There are no default values for sales document type CF for order- and delivery-related billing documents. Item category KBN is not relevant for billing.
1-1-5 Consignment issue
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order à Create Order type: KE Consignment issue
à Sales document à Deliver à Edit à Post goods issue
1-1-6 Check the consignment material stock.
Unrestricted use: 1900 Consignment stock: 50
1-1-7 Optional
Bill the consignment issue. Can you do it?
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Billing à Billing document à Create à Enter document number of delivery
Yes
Cause: A delivery-related billing document has been defined for item category KEN in Customizing. Billing document type F2 has been proposed for delivery-related billing in sales document type CI.
1-1-8 Consignment pick-up
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order à Create Order type: KA Consignment pick-up
Deliver the order and post a goods issue.
à Sales document à Deliver à Edit à Post goods issue
1-1-9 Check the consignment material stock.
Unrestricted use: 1950 Consignment stock: 0
1-1-10 Optional
Bill the consignment pick-up. Can you do it?
No.
Why or why not?
Log: A billing type could not be determined. Cause: Billing has not been defined for the consignment pick-up. There are no default values for sales document type CP for order- and delivery-related billing documents. Delivery type LR does not contain a default order type from which alternative default values for order- and delivery-related billing documents could be determined. In addition, item category KAN is not relevant for billing.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
1-2 Optional Display the consignment fill-up and the consignment issue. Which item and schedule line categories did the system determine?
Item Category Schedule Line Cat.
Consignment fill-up KBN E0
Consignment issue KEN CO
1-3 Optional
How and why are these schedule line categories different from each other?
Schedule line category E0: Movement type 631 (GI consignment lending) Schedule line category C0: Movement type 633 (GI Issue consignment customer)
During the fill-up, the affected stocks are moved from unrestricted use stocks to the customer’s consignment stocks (special stocks). The goods remain in the customer’s possession. Consignment issue posts the goods from the special stock and they become the property of the customer.
1-4 What are the differences in Customizing for sales document types DF and SDF?
Entry C in the Reference mandatory field means that document type SDF can only be created with reference to an order.
The item categories for these order types are not relevant for billing.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Incompletion
l Incompletion log
l Incompletion status
l Incompletion procedure
l Lists of incomplete orders
Unit Contents:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Incompletion: Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
l Explain the incompletion log and process incomplete orders
l Adjust the incompletion log in Customizing to meet your requirements
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Incompletion: Course Overview Diagram
§
0,--ORORLFLFF2F2
7. Data flow8. Special Business
Transactions
12. Materialdetermination
2. Organizationalunits
4. Sales document type
11. Outlineagreements
13. Freegoods
6. Schedule line cat.
5. Item category
3. Sales Order Processing
10. Partnerdetermination
1. Introduction
9. Incompletion
XYZ/99XYZ/99M1M1 -?--?-
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
Incompleteness: Business Scenario
l A variety of information is required to ensure that the sales processes at your company run smoothly.
l The amount of information required can differ depending on the process.
l It is your responsibility to configure the system in such a way to make sure that people can verify that the document data is complete during document entry.
l You want to control which subsequent functions of the document are blocked depending on which information is missing in the document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 1999
Incompleteness Log
Sold-to party: C1Order number: ---
F2F2
F3F3
Is called up:a) Automatically when savedb) Through the menu
F5F5
Order
Order: Incompleteness Log x
Item
10
Missing dataPO numberRouteSchedule line
Item 10Material: M3Route: ---
Schedule line
Schedule line
Item 20Material: M2Route: 00001
n An incompleteness log is a list of all the data essential to your company in a sales document that has not yet been entered in the system.
n You can define these data fields in Customizing for the incompleteness log. n The system goes directly from the incompleteness log to the different views where you can then edit
the incomplete data.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 1999
Lists of Incomplete Orders
Start
Review data
ListOrder 4231Order 6574Order 7019
Order: 6574Sold-to party: C1
Material
M1
M4
Quantity
10
15
Item
10
20
Save
Selection
Incomplete orders
Selection viaCreated by LO605-##
n Every employee can list all of the incomplete sales orders that they have created. They can also display certain documents that have been blocked for a particular step in a selection screen, such as a list of all the documents blocked for shipping due to incompleteness.
n Incomplete orders can be then called up from the list and completed. When you have finished processing, the system automatically returns to the list of incomplete documents.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 2003
Incomplete Sales Documents
Incompleteness dialog
Sales document type
The document mustbe completely
maintained
YesStill
possible to save document ?
Sales document
Sold-to party:C1 Smith New York
Is documentcomplete ?
NoYes
No
Block subsequent functions in document:
For example: - Create w/ reference - Shipping- Billing document
n In Customizing for sales document types, the incomplete messages field allows you to control whether incomplete sales documents can be saved or not. If this switch is not set, then the further course of the business process is determined from the status groups of the incompleteness procedure.
n The procedure controls what effects the incomplete data has on the process. n Examples � If the terms of payment are missing, the order can be delivered but it cannot be billed. At the same
time, you will not be able to create a new order with reference to an incomplete order. � The incompleteness log tells you if the purchase order number is missing, but you can continue to
process the document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 1999
Controlling the Incompleteness Log
Assignment
Procedure
Incompleteness log
Sales document header
Sales document item
Sales document schedule line
10 Inquiry and quotation
11 Order
...Purchase order numberCurrency Terms of payment
Sales doc. type Procedure
QT QuotationOR Standard orderZO Z order
101111
n The incompleteness log differentiates between the following levels: � Sales document header � Sales document item � Sales document schedule line
n In each procedure you determine which fields are checked for completion. n You determine areas of validity by assigning procedures.
For example, you can assign the incompleteness procedure for the sales document header, using the sales document type. � Procedure at header level -> Sales document type � Procedure at item level -> Item category � Procedure at schedule line level -> Schedule line category
n You can also flag partner functions, texts and condition types in pricing as mandatory. If these entries are then missing, a note will appear in the incompleteness log.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
SAP AG 1999
Status of Incomplete Sales Documents
0101
0202
0303
...
..
.
General Delivery Billing Pricing(Sales)General Delivery Billing Pricing(Sales)
X
65Order Field Status group
PO number 01Currency 03Terms of payment 03
Procedure
X
X
X
X
Statusgroup
n Incomplete document data affects further processing in different ways. A status group is assigned to each field in the incompleteness procedure.
n When you define the status groups, you decide which steps should be prevented if data is missing. n Examples � Incomplete for delivery -> No delivery is possible � Incomplete for billing -> No billing is possible � Incomplete for pricing -> No order confirmation or billing are possible
n A status group can contain any number of these effects. n This allows you to control the effect of incomplete data separately for each field.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
SAP AG 1999
Incompletion: Summary
You are now able to:
l Explain the incompletion log and process incomplete orders
l Adjust the incompletion log in Customizing to meet your requirements
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
Incompleteness - Exercises
Unit: Incompleteness
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Use the incompleteness log for sales documents during document processing and control it in Customizing
1.
The incompleteness log ensures that you cannot continue with certain steps in the business process when essential data is missing.
1-1 You would like to ensure that sales documents of type ZA## cannot be left incomplete in sales order processing.
1-1-1 Create an order with order type ZA## for customer T-S62A## and material T-ATA## (10 units) and save the document without a purchase order number. Can you do it? _________________________________
1-1-2 Activate the Incomplete. messages indicator for sales document type ZA##.
1-1-3 Create another order with order type ZA## for customer T-S62A## and material T-ATA## (10 units) and save the document without a purchase order number. Can you do it? _________________________________
1-1-4 Process the incompleteness log by maintaining purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##07. Save the document.
1-1-5 Delete the Incomplet. messages indicator for this sales document type.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
1-2 You want to ensure that the name of the contact person (Document header: Tab page Purchase Order Data, Field Name) who is responsible for the sales order is always entered in trade fair orders.
1-2-1 Create incompleteness procedure Y# with description Order procedure ## (key of the new procedure for each student group: see the following table):
Key: Y# (see the following table!) Description Order procedure ##
Key of the new procedure for each student group (ignore the system message regarding the namespace conventions):
Group number
Proced. Group number
Proced. Group number
Proced.
01 YA 07 YG 13 YM
02 YB 08 YH 14 YN
03 YC 09 YI 15 YO
04 YD 10 YJ 16 YP
05 YE 11 YK 17 YQ
06 YF 12 YL 18 YR
1-2-2 Copy the field for the ordering party’s name BNAME from table VBAK into the procedure. This field will be displayed in the KBES Header - Purchase order data sales order screen. If the ordering party’s name is missing in the sales document, the system should not create a delivery. Assign a corresponding status group.
1-2-3 Assign incompleteness procedure Y# to sales document type ZA##.
1-3 Create an order with order type ZA## for customer T-S62A## and material T-ATA## (10 units).
1-3-1 Save the incomplete order.
1-3-2 Try to deliver the order. Set the selection date to a month from today. What message appears? _________________________________
1-3-3 Change the order and edit the incompleteness log.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
1-3-4 Try to deliver the order again. Can you do it? _________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
Incompleteness - Solutions
Unit: Incompleteness
1-1 You would like to ensure that sales documents of type ZA## cannot be left incomplete in sales order processing.
1-1-1 Create an order and save it without entering a purchase order number. Can you do it?
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create
Yes, the document can be saved even though not all data is complete.
1-1-2 Set the Incomplet. messages indicator in sales order type ZA## (select the IC dialog field)
IMG à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Sales Documents à Sales Document Header àDefine sales document types à Select document type ZA## à Activate indicator à Save
1-1-3 Create an order and save it without entering a purchase order number. Can you do it?
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create
No
1-1-4 Edit the incompleteness log and save the document.
à Button: Complete data à Enter the purchase order number à Back à Save
1-1-5 Delete the Incomplet. messages indicator for this sales document type. (delete the indicator you set above in field IC dialog) à see above (1-1-2)
1-2 You want to ensure that the name of the contact person who is responsible for the sales order is always entered in trade fair orders.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
1-2-1 Create incompleteness procedure Y# (key of the new procedure for each student group: see table in unit ”Exercises”):
IMG à Sales and Distribution à Basic Functions à Incompleteness à Define Incompleteness Procedures à Select group A à Dialog structure: Procedures à Button: Change à Button: New entries
1-2-2 Add the field for the ordering party’s name to the procedure and assign it a status group.
à Dialog structure: Fields à Button: New entries à Maintain entries Status group: 02 à Save à Exit
Note: You can determine the names of tables and fields in the sales document by placing the cursor on the relevant field, pressing F1 and pressing the button: Technical info. (Document header: Tab page Purchase Order Data, Field Name)
1-2-3 Assign incompleteness procedure Y# to sales document type ZA##.
IMG à Sales and Distribution à Basic Functions à Log of incomplete items… àAssign incompleteness procedures à Assign procedures to sales document types à Maintain entries à ?Save à Exit
1-3 Create Order
1-3-1 Save the incomplete order.
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create
1-3-2 Try to deliver the order. What message appears?
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Change order à Sales document à Deliver
Message: The order cannot be delivered Log: Order is incomplete (please maintain)
1-3-3 Change the order and edit the incompleteness log.
Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Sales à ?Order à Change à Edit à Log of incomplete items à Select the ordering party’s name à Button: Complete data à Back
1-3-4 Try to deliver the order again. Can you do it?
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
à Sales document à Deliver
Yes, the order can be delivered.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Business Partners and Partner Determination
l Partner functions
l Partner types
l Partner determination procedure
Unit Contents:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Partner Determination: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to
l Name the most important criteria for determining business partners
l Set up new business partners in Customizing
l Include additional business partners in the sales process
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Partner Determination: Course Overview Diagram
XYZ/99M1 -?-
§
0,--ORORLFLFF2F2
7. Data flow8. Special Business
Transactions
9. Incompletion
12. Materialdetermination
2. Organizationalunits
4. Sales document type
11. Outlineagreements
13. Freegoods
6. Schedule line cat.
5. Item category
3. Sales Order Processing
1. Introduction
10. Partnerdetermination
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
Partner Determination: Business Scenario
l As part of your efforts to improve customer service, you want to assign each of your customers a sales employee as their own personal representative.
l This information should be available automatically in your sales documents.
l Your company is also investigating whether you can evaluate this data, to obtain the criteria for awarding performance bonuses to your staff.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 1999
Business Partners
Market
Customer
Vendor Customer
Contactperson
Contactperson
Company
Employee
Employee
1
1 2
2
34
5
6
n Different business partners with different business relationships with each other all exist within a marketplace.
n Examples of business partners are: � Customer � Vendor � Employee � Contact person
n Examples of business relationships are: � 1. Vendor-customer: The vendor acts as the forwarding agent to the customer � 2. Contact person - customer: The contact person is employed at the customer's company � 3. Contact person - customer: The contact person is the customer's consultant but does not work
in the same company � 4. Customer-customer: Sold-to party and ship-to party are different people � 5. Employee - contact person: Contact person is looked after individually � 6. Employee - customer: Customer manager
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 1999
Partner types
Create soldCreate sold--to partyto party
Partner functions
Contact person
Sold-to party
Sales employee
Contact partner number
Customer number
Personnel number
Sold-to party Ship-to party
Partner Partner functionfunction
Payer
Forwarding agent
Vendor
Buyer
= Customer
= Employee
= Vendor= Contact person
Contactperson
Representative
Salespersonnel
n The business partners that exist in the marketplace are represented with a partner type in the R/3 System.
n Partner types AP, KU, LI and PE are defined in partner processing for the Sales and Distribution application module. These are defined as follows: � AP Contact person � KU Customer � LI Vendor � PE Personnel
In other applications (such as Service Management) different partner types have been defined (for example, O for organizational unit, S for position, A for work center).
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 1999
Partner Functions
FA Forwarding agent
SH Ship-to party
PY Payer
ER Employeeresponsible BP Bill-to party
. . . . .
SP Sold-to party
AP Contact person
BusinessBusinesspartnerpartner
n While the partner types allow us to distinguish between different business partners, the partner functions represent the roles they play within the business transaction. � For example, different customers (customer partners) can assume certain roles in a business
transaction. The customer who places the order does not necessarily have to be the same customer who receives the goods or the customer who is responsible for paying the invoice.
n Assigning partner functions in the SAP system determines the function(s) of particular partners in the sales process. One partner may take on several functions. � In the simplest case, all the partner functions within the customer partner type would be assigned
to one business partner, in other words, the same customer would be the sold-to party, ship-to party, payer and bill-to party.
n You can enter contact persons for a customer directly in the customer master and they are automatically assigned to that customer. The contact person can also be assigned to another customer, for example, in a consultant role.
n The forwarding agent is an example of a vendor. n Employees of your own company (such as sales representatives or clerks) are managed in the
employee master records. They can assume partner functions of partner type "Personnel", such as partner function ER, responsible employee.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 1999
Partners in the Sales Process
Partner functions:SP Sold-to party: C1BP Bill-to party: C1PY Payer: C1SH Ship-to party: C1, C2, C3
HEADERSP : C1 PY : C1SH : C2 PY : C1
ITEM 1
ITEM 2
SH : C2 C3
Proposal
+ selection
Changes possible ifpartner function SH isconfigured at item level
Also valid for items unless
agreed to otherwise
Customer master
Order
n You can maintain partner relationships both in sales documents and in the master data. Partner relationships are usually already defined in the customer master. They are proposed automatically in the document header when you create a sales document. � If Customizing permits it, you can change or supplement these relationships manually by going to
the partner screen and changing the function assignment. n In Customizing, you decide whether several partners can be assigned to one partner function in the
customer master. If multiple partners of the same function are maintained, when you then enter a sales order, a selection list appears containing these partners.
n In the sales documents, the system has been configured so that only one partner can be assigned to each partner function. The only exception is for outline agreements (partner functions AA and AW).
n You can also define partners at item level in the sales documents. However, business partners that are only defined in the header cannot be changed at item level.
n You can determine which partner functions must be entered (mandatory functions). n You can prohibit anyone from changing a partner that has already been entered (for example, you
could indicate the sold-to party cannot be changed in the sales document). n It is also possible to enter or change the address of a partner, such as the ship-to party, manually.
This change does not affect the master record.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
SAP AG 1999
Partner Determination Procedure (1)
Customer masterSales document headerSales document itemDelivery Billing headerBilling itemSales activity (CAS)
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
SAP AG 1999
Partner Determination Procedure (2)
Procedure for sales documents
Customer masterSales document headerSales document itemDelivery Billing headerBilling itemSales activity (CAS)
Procedure for customer master records
(1)(1) (1)(1)
AG Sold-to partyRG PayerWE Ship-to party
TA Standard orderSM Product proposalKAB Release order
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
SAP AG 1999
Partner Determination Procedure (3)
Procedure for sales documents
AG Sold-to partyRG PayerWE Ship-to party
Customer masterSales document headerSales document itemDelivery Billing headerBilling itemSales activity (CAS)
TA Standard orderSM Product proposalKAB Release order
Procedure for customer master records
Sold-to partyShip-to partyPayerSales partner Forwarding agent. . .
(2)(2)(2)(2)
(1)(1) (1)(1)
Possible partner functions
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
SAP AG 1999
Partner Determination Procedure (4)
Procedure for sales documents
SP Sold-to partyPY PayerST Ship-to party
Customer masterSales document headerSales document itemDelivery Billing headerBilling itemSales activity (CAS)
OR Standard orderSM Product proposalKAB Release order
QT QuotationOR Standard orderDF Free-of-charge delivery. . .
0001 Sold-to party0100 Distribution centerCPD One-time customers. . .
Assign to document type
Procedure for customer master records
Assign to account group
Sold-to partyShip-to partyPayerSales partner Forwarding agent. . .
Defined partnerfunctions
(2)(2)
(3)(3)
(2)(2)
(3)(3)
(1)(1) (1)(1)
n Partners appear in the system at different levels, such as the customer master, in the sales document header, in the sales document items, and so on.
n You can define your own partner determination procedures for each of these levels. n A partner determination procedure is where you determine which partner functions should or must
appear. n You determine areas of validity by assigning procedures.
For example, you use the account group to assign the partner determination procedure for the customer master. The partner procedures are assigned to the partner objects as follows: � Partner object Assignment key � Customer master -> Account group � Sales document header -> Sales doc. type � Sales document item -> Item category in sales � Delivery -> Delivery type � Shipment -> Shipment type � Billing header -> Billing type � Billing item -> Billing type � Sales activities (CAS) -> Sales activity type
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
SAP AG 1999
Customer Master and Account Group
0001 Sold-to party
0002 Ship-to party
0003 Payer
0004 Bill-to party
Field selectionNumber assignmentOne-time account: Yes/NoProposed message
ACCOUNT GROUP 0001
Create sold-to party
Customer : C1
Sales organization : 1000
Distribution channel : 10
Division : 00
Account group : 0001
ACCOUNT GROUP
n The account group controls the amount of data and the response of customer master records. Account groups are already defined in the standard SAP system, such as account group 0001 Sold-to party, 0002 Ship-to party, 0003 Payer, and so on. . . You can create additional account groups as necessary.
n When you define the account group, you determine: � For each data field, whether it is displayed or not and whether maintenance is mandatory, optional,
or not possible � The number range � A number of other control elements, such as for partners and texts of the customer master
n Example: A customer master record for a customer that only acts as a ship-to party (created with account group 0002) requires the information relevant for shipping. The billing information is not required, which is why the corresponding fields are not displayed.
n In contrast to the account group, which controls a customer master record, the partner function determines which partner assumes specific business functions within the sales process.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
SAP AG 1999
Permitted Partner Functions per Account Groups
Partner function SP à Account group 0001, 0005, CPD,...
Account group (Definition)
0001 Sold-to party0002 Ship-to party0003 Payer0004 Bill-to party0005 Prospective customer0007 Sales partner. . .
Partner function (definition)
SP Sold-to partySH Ship-to partyPY PayerBP Bill-to partyCP Contact personFA Forwarding agent. . .
In which account group can customersassume the role of the sold-to party?
In which account group can customersassume the role of the ship-to party?
Partner function SH à Account group 0001, 0002, CPD,...
n For organized sales processing, it is important that each customer is only used for the functions within a document that have been assigned to him or her. You can guarantee this by assigning permitted partner functions to each account group.
n If you choose partner type customer for a new partner function, you then have to determine which of your customers can be entered for this partner type.
n Because you control the customers through the account group, you assign all the defined partner functions to each account group. As a result, the account group of a customer also controls the possible partner functions.
n Examples from the standard system: � Customers in the following account groups can be sold-to parties:
0001, 0005, 0007, CPD, and so on . . � Customers in account groups 0002 (ship-to party), 0003 (payer) or 0004
(bill-to party) cannot be sold-to parties.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
SAP AG 1999
Partner Determination for Sales Documents
Order
Sold-to party:C1 Smith New York
Partners
SP C1 Smith NYSH S1 Smith SFPY P1 Smith HQ. . .. . .
?Origin
Customerhierarchy
KNVH
Creditrepresentative
T024P
System user
Customer master
KNVP
Contactperson
KNVK
n When you create sales documents, the business partners are automatically copied from the customer master. In the process, the customer master of the sold-to party is accessed.
n Several partner relationships are stored in the customer master record for a sold-to party. The system can also copy a partner function from other customer master records to create a partner for the sales document by specifying the source of the partner function and the determination sequence. When you do, you should note the sequence in which the system determines the partners. � Example of indirect partner functions:
You have different regular suppliers in different regions. You want the system to determine the forwarding agent in the sales document dependent on the ship-to party. In Customizing, you determine that the system determines the ship-to party first by accessing the master record for the sold-to party. Then it accesses the ship-to party's master record to determine the forwarding agent.
n You can also use other sources to automatically determine business partners in sales documents, such as the tables for customer hierarchy (KNVH), contact persons (KNVK), credit representatives (T024P), and so on. . .
n An analysis function is available for tracing the automatic determination of business partners in sales documents in detail.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
SAP AG 1999
Partner Determination: Unit Summary
You are now able to:
l Name the most important criteria for determining business partners
l Set up new business partners in Customizing
l Include additional business partners in the sales process
(C) SAP AG SCM605 17
Business Partners and Partner Determination - Exercises
Unit: Business Partners and Partner Determination
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Include and control your own business partners in the master data and business processes
Your company wants to improve their customer care. Therefore, you would like to assign a personal representative to important customers, such as customer T-S62C##, who would then be responsible for ensuring that the business transactions with that customer run smoothly.
1-1 Enter a new partner function 9# for the personal representative in Customizing. (Key of the new role for each student group: see the following table):
Key: 9# (see the following table!) Description: Representative ## Partner type: PE
Keys of the new function for each student group:
Group number
Partner function
Group number
Partner function
Group number
Partner function
01 9A 07 9G 13 9M
02 9B 08 9H 14 9N
03 9C 09 9I 15 9O
04 9D 10 9J 16 9P
05 9E 11 9K 17 9Q
06 9F 12 9L 18 9R
(C) SAP AG SCM605 18
1-2 Create a new partner determination procedure Z## with description Procedure ## for object ”customer master”.
Enter the following partner functions:
– SP Sold-to party (cannot be changed, mandatory function) – SP Ship-to party (mandatory function) – PY Ship-to party (mandatory function) – BP Payer (mandatory function) – 9# Representative ##
Customer T-S62C##’s master record is controlled by account group ZK##. Assign the new procedure to account group ZK##.
1-3 Extend the customer master record for customer T-S62C## with the personal representative.
Note: In the master data menu for Sales, choose: → Business partners → Customers → Change → Sales and Distribution → Button: Sales area data; Sales tab card: Partner functions Enter employee 1701## in the partner screen as the personal representative and save the master record.
1-4 Optional
In the next step, verify that the new partner in the master record will be automatically controlled in document type ZA##.
1-4-1 Create a new partner determination procedure Y## with description Order procedure ## for object ”sales document type”.
1-4-2 Enter the following partner functions:
– SP Sold-to party (cannot be changed, mandatory function) – SH Ship-to party (mandatory function) – BP Bill- to party (mandatory function) – PY Payer (mandatory function) – 9# Representative ## (mandatory function) – SE Sales employee
1-4-3 Assign the new procedure to sales document type ZA##.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 19
1-5 Optional
Determine whether the partner function 9# Representative ## was automatically transferred from the customer master record to the order.
1-5-1 Create a trade fair## order for customer T-S62C## (purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##06). Determine whether the partner function 9# representative ## has been stored as a partner in the order header.
1-5-2 Also enter an employee called Hubert Schwarz as the sales employee.
1-5-3 Can you determine the sales employee from the sold-to party’s master record? _________________________________ Why or why not? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 20
Business Partners and Partner Determination - Solutions
Unit: Business Partners and Partner Determination
1-1 Create a new partner function
IMG à Sales and Distribution à? Partner Determination à? Set Up Partner Determination à? Set Up Partner Determination for Customer Master à? Partner Functions Folder (Double-click) à? Button: New entries à??Create partner function 9# à ?Save
1-2 Create new partner determination procedure for customer master data
à Partner Determination Procedures (Double-click) à Button: New entries à??Create partner determination procedure 9# à??Save
à Select procedure Z## à Partner Functions in Procedure Folder (Double-click) à Button: New Entries à Enter Function à Save
à Partner Determination Procedure Assignment (Double-click) à Assign account group ZK## the partner procedure Z## à Save
1-3 Extend the customer master record for customer T-S62C## with the personal representative.
?à Business partners à Customer à? Change à? Sales and distribution à Button: Sales area data à?? Sales tab card: Partner function à Partner function: Add representative ##
1-4 Optional
Create a new partner determination procedure for object “Sales document header”
1-4-1 IMG à?Sales and Distribution à?Partner Determination à ?Set Up Partner Determination à ?Set Up Partner Determination for Customer Master à ?Partner Functions Folder (Double-click) à?Button: New entries à ?Create partner determination procedure Y## à ?Save
1-4-2 Create partner function
à Select procedure Y## à Partner Functions in Procedure Folder (Double-click) à Button: New Entries à Enter Functions à Save
(C) SAP AG SCM605 21
1-4-3 Assign procedure
à Partner Determination Procedure Assignment (Double-click) à Assign Sales document type ZA## the partner procedure Y## à Save
1-5 Optional
Check whether the new partner function was automatically transferred from the customer master record to the order.
1-5-1 Create Order
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type: ZA##) à Create
1-5-2 Create the sales representative
à Goto à Header à Partners à Search for the employee using a matchcode
1-5-3 Can you determine the sales employee from the sold-to party’s master record?
No.
Why or why not?
Partner procedure Z##, which controls this customer, does not contain this function. As a result, you cannot save the function of the sales employee in the customer’s master record. This means that the system cannot use the customer master to propose this partner in the sales document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 2003
Outline Agreements
l Scheduling agreement
l Quantity contract
l Value contract
l Partners authorized to release
l Contract data and rental contracts
Unit Contents:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 2003
Outline Agreements: Unit Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
l Use different types of outline agreements and their functions
l Configure outline agreements in Customizing so that they meet your requirements
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 2003
Outline Agreements: Course Overview Diagram
XYZ/99M1 -?-
0,--ORORLFLFCRCR
7. Data Flow8. Special Business
Transactions
9. Incomp-leteness
12. MaterialDetermination
2. OrganizationalUnits
4. Sales Document Type
11. OutlineAgreements
13. FreeGoods
6. Schedule Line Category
5. Item Category
3. Sales Order Processing
10. PartnerDetermination
1. Introduction
§§
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 2003
Outline Agreements: Business Scenario
l Your company, IDES AG, has excellent business relationships with many of its customers, and conducts frequent transactions with them.
l Together with these customers, your company wants to plan the business processes for the future based on contractual agreements.
l Different types of outline agreements will be needed, depending on the product and the customer involved.
l It is your responsibility to find out the extent to which the different outline agreements can be modelled using the available sales document types in the SAP R/3 System.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 2003
Contracts - Sales Document Types
Outline Agreements
Scheduling Agreements
• SA Schedulingagreement
• BL Sched. agrmnt w. del. sched.
• DEL Sched. agrmnt for external agent
• . . .
Contracts
• NMS Quantity contract
• WK1 General valuecontract
• WK2 Material-related value contract
• RC Rental contract
• SC Service and maintenance
n Outline agreements play an important role in nearly all business processes. Customers and vendors agree on the goods to be provided under certain conditions and within a specific timeframe. Outline agreements streamline business processes for both partners in a business relationship.
n Different sales document types represent different outline agreements in the SAP System. The standard SAP System contains a range of different document types that you can either use directly or copy as references.
n The two main outline agreements are scheduling agreements and contracts. n The simplest and most common type of scheduling agreement is represented in the system with
document type SA. Document types for scheduling agreements such as BL or DEL are special cases, that are used in the automotive component supplier industry.
n There are two types of contracts - value and quantity. Contracts can cover both goods and services. Generally, no restrictions apply to the different contract forms.
n Rental and maintenance contracts are frequently used in the service industry. Maintenance contracts are signed for products that the customer uses over a long period of time and which need to be serviced during that time. Alongside maintenance contracts, we also offer the Service Management application module whose functions are explained in another course.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 2003
Scheduling Agreements
Scheduling Agreement
1.4.1.6.
Delivery
Delivery
Delivery
n A scheduling agreement is an outline agreement between you and a sold-to party that is valid for a certain period of time. The scheduling agreement contains fixed delivery dates and quantities.
n These dates are contained in the schedule lines for the scheduling agreements. Once the scheduling agreement is due for delivery, you can create the delivery as normal or by using a delivery due list.
n When you enter schedule lines for an item in the scheduling agreement, the system adds up the quantities that have already been entered and compares them to both the target quantity and the quantity already shipped. This gives you an overview of all the open quantities.
n If the quantity in the schedule lines exceeds the target quantity, the system issues a warning message. n If the customer requires it, you can process invoices periodically, for example, once a month. All the
deliveries due for the billing document are combined in a collective invoice.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 2003
Quantity Contracts
Update released quantities
Contract
Delivery
Delivery
Delivery
Release Order
Release Order
Release Order
n A contract is an outline agreement between you and your customer that is valid for a certain time period. The contract does not contain any schedule lines, delivery quantities, or delivery dates. The same functions are available in contracts as in orders. You can also agree on special pr ice agreements or delivery times.
n The customer fulfills the contract with individual releases. Schedule lines are created in the release order when it is placed. The release order is then processed like a standard order. Any special agreements regarding pr ices or delivery deadlines are copied from the contract.
n Release orders are created with reference to a contract. This generates a document flow record that allows you to update released quantities and values in the contract.
n In copying control, you decide which types of sales documents can be used as release orders from a contract.
n You can create release orders in the following ways: � Choose Create with reference on the initial screen � In the Sales document menu, choose Sales document -> Create with reference -> To contract... � Assign an order item to a contract subsequently � Use the automatic system search for open outline agreements when you create an order
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 2003
Messages Regarding Open Outline Agreements
M1 100 PCM2 30 L
Order
Material Value
M3 5 PC 5 000 USD
- 10%
discount
Customer: Smith Inc. London
Open Outline Agreements x
There are open outline agreements for material M3
Continue.
List
Cancelx
Referenced DocumentsList Edit Goto System Help
Open Documents for Customer
Copyü
OrderType Doc Item. . .
KM 40000069 0010 . . .
KM 40001292 0030 . . .
. . .
n You can configure Customizing for the sales document type so that when you create a release order the system automatically searches for any open outline agreements. You can choose several options for the search and how the system should react if the search is successful: � Blank No checks � A/B Check at header / item level:
The system compares the customer and material numbers. If there are any open outline agreements, it displays a dialog box where you can choose whether to display a list of the agreements or continue processing the sales order. � C/D Check at header / item level and copy if unique:
If the system finds exactly one open outline agreement, the document is created automatically. Instead of displaying a dialog box, the system issues an informational message in the status ba r for the release. � E/F Check at header / item level and branch immediately to selection list:
Instead of displaying a dialog box, the system immediately goes to the selection list. No dialog box is displayed. If there is only one open contract, ,the system reacts as in C/D.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
SAP AG 2002
Value Contracts
Contract
Item Target Value
10 10 000 Euro
- 10% discount
Customer: Smith AGHeadquarters
Validity: 01/2003 -12/2004
n The value contract is an outline agreement between you and your customer. It defines that your customer agrees to purchase a fixed total value (target amount) of goods and services during the defined period.
n The value contract can contain other agreements between you and your customer that are checked in the release orders: � Special price agreements � Customer restrictions � Material restrictions
n If you create an order for which a valid contract exists, the system will inform you of this if you have activated the relevant check in Customizing for the sales document type.
n You can change the target values in the contract later.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
SAP AG 2003
Valid Materials
ProductHierarchy
Level
1 00001 Tools00001 Tools
0000100001 Electric 0000100002 Pneum.2
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D1 Installation
M1 Material 1
M5 Material 5
D3 Maintenance... ...
AssortmentModule
n In the standard system you can restrict the materials that can be released in a value contract in the following ways: � Product hierarchy (can be searched for generically by entering the first few digits such as
0000101*) � List of valid materials (assortment module)
n If both the product hierarchy and the assortment module are maintained in the document, all of the materials that belong to one or other of the material groups are valid for the release order (logical OR link).
n Assortment modules for value contracts are maintained in the master data for products. You can define a validity period for each material in the assortment module. When you create a release order, the system checks the respective entry date against the validity period.
n If you have not made any entries in the document, all the materials defined in sales can be released unless there are any other restrictions in copying control at item level. These materials are also limited in that they must be permitted for the sales area assigned to the value contract (copying control).
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
SAP AG 2002
Value Contracts - Release Orders
Release Order
Material Value
M1 4PC 6 000 Euro6 000 Euro
-- 10% discount10% discount
Customer: Smith Inc.Munich
Release Order
Material Value
M2 3Pc 6 000 Euro
- 10% discount
Customer: Smith Inc.Hamburg
Release Order
Material Value
M3 5 PC 5 000 Euro
- 10% discount
Customer: Smith Inc. New York
Contractalreadyfulfilled
Contract
Item Target Value
10 10 000 Euro
- 10% discount
Customer: Smith Inc.Headquarters
Validity: 01/03- 12/04
n A release order releases a partial quantity of the agreed total value of the goods or services from a contract. The release order is a type of sales order.
n Normally, you create a release order with reference to a contract. Several functions exist for searching for the relevant contract: � Search for suitable contracts using the partner number � Search for suitable partners using the contract number (for customer lists only)
n With the item selection function, you can select items from all the valid materials. You can choose
materials directly or by exploding an assortment module. n Delivery quantities and times are stored in the schedule lines for the release order. n You can create release orders in any currency and the total value is updated in the currency of the
contract. n When you create a release order, the system checks the requirements stored in the contract such as
the release rule or validity period. The value of the release order is compared with the value still open in the contract. You can define how the system responds when this value is exceeded.
n You can assign an order to a contract later both at header and item level. The system automatically re-determines pricing. Values in the contract can only be updated when this assignment is defined at item level.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
SAP AG 2002
Billing Value Contracts
Contract
Item Target Value
10 10 000 Euro
- 10% discount
Customer: Smith Inc.Headquarters
Validity: 01/03- 12/04
Release Order
Material Net Value
M3 5 PC 5 000 Euro
- 10% discount
Customer: Smith Inc. New York
Bill Doc
Material Net Value
M1 2 PC .... Euro
M2 5 PC .... Euro
Customer: Smith Inc.
Billrelease?
Billing plan?
n You can either bill the value contract directly or you can bill each release order. � Billing a release order
You can use standard order OR for release orders. Billing can be either order- or delivery-related.
� Billing a value contract Order type WA exists in the standard system for the release. The value contract is then billed according to the order. A billing plan allows you to bill the contract for several dates and partial quantities at once. The system automatically adjusts the open billing dates if you make a subsequent change to the target value in an item in the value contract.
n The system does not support automatic billing of value contracts that have not been completely released.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
SAP AG 2002
Controlling Value Contracts
Sales Doc. Type Item Category
l WK1 WKN
lWK2Material-related
WKCItem Category Group: VCIT
Usage Flag: -
Item Category Group: -
Usage Flag: VCTRWith or withoutAssortment Module
withValue Contract
Material
n There are two types of value contracts in the SAP standard system: � WK1 General value contract: This order type allows you to refer to different materials and
services according to the selection options described earlier. � WK2 Material-related value contract: This is used when the contract contains exactly one material
(for example, configurable). n In Customizing, you only distinguish between the sales document types for value contracts WK1 and
WK2 in the screen sequence group for document header and item. n You can maintain the value contract material in the item category. It acts as a technical vehicle in the
contract item for determining important data, such as account assignments, taxes or statistical updates.
n Document type WK1 uses item category WKN. Document type WK2 uses item category WKC. According to what you enter in the item, the system determines the item category with the usage indicator VCTR or the item category group VCIT. In copying control, you can decide at item level if the value contract material should be copied to the release, (WKC) or not (WKN).
n If a release exceeds the target value in a contract item, you can configure how the system reacts: no response, two different warning messages and an error message.
n In the standard system, value contracts (document determination procedure Y) use pricing procedure WK0001 with condition type WK00 for the agreed target value.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
SAP AG 2003
Partners Authorized to Release in Contract
Contract
Material Value
M1 4St 6 000 Euro
- 10% discount
Sold-To Party:Smith Inc.,
New YorkPartner authorized to release: Smith & Little, SF
Partner Function SP
Partner Function AA
Customer Hierarchy
n Normally, both the sold-to party and other business partners are authorized to release from a contract. This means that the central office for a company can decide which of its branches can release from a contract. There may also be several ship-to parties.
n To meet this requirement, maintain the Check partner authorization field in Customizing for the sales document type. In the sales order, you can then display the partners authorized to release in a customer list (rule A) or in the customer hierarchy (rule B).
n The partner determination procedure assigns the partners authorized to release against the contract. n If there are several partners authorized to release against a contract, you can choose the relevant
partner from a list when you create the release order. n If there are several ship-to parties that are authorized to release for the selected sold-to party, you can
choose the relevant one from a list when you create the release. n So that the releasing partner can be different than the sold-to party for the contract, copying control
uses requirement 002 (different customer to that in header) at header level.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
SAP AG 2002
Partners Authorized to Release: Customer List
Contract40002000
Header/Partner
SPBPPYSH
AAAAAA
AWAWAW
4711472247334744
481048114812
491049114912
OrderHeader/Partner
SPBPPYSH
4812472247334911
Select SH
4711 Meyer4810 Glory4811 Baker4812 Cohen
New YorkDallasPhoenixSan Diegox
Select: SP x
Releasing Partner
Contract 40002000
Requested deliv. date D 19.06.200x
Create Order: Initial Screen x
Select SH
4744 Meyer4910 Webber4911 Singer4912 Hart
Las VegasPhoenixPhoenixPhoenix
x
Select: SH x
Rule A Check Contract Partners If there is a customer list, you can store the partners authorized to release directly in the partner
screen for the contract document. In the standard system, partner function AA has been defined for use as an optional sold-to party partner function in the relevant partner determination procedure (KAB procedure in the standard system).
n Alternative ship-to parties are represented by partner function AW. n If there are already several possible sold-to parties in the customer master record (partner functions
SP and AA), when you create the contract, the system displays a selection screen where you can choose and copy several partners in one step.
n Partners authorized to release are only checked at header level.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
SAP AG 2003
Contract Data in Sales Documents
Dismantling Date:
OrderScreen: Contract Data
Contract Start: 07.01.
Installation Date:
Acceptance Date:
Contract Conclusion:
Contract End: 31.12.
Requested Cancellation Date:
Cancelling Party:
Cancellation Received:
Sales Doc. Type: RC
Contract Data Allowed: X
Sales Doc. Type: RCRental Contract
Customer: C1
Order
Header
Item 10
Item 20
IMG
n In Customizing for sales document types, you can activate the contract data. � Blank No contract data � X Contract data is permitted. Any changes to the contract header are not copied to the items. � Y Contract data is permitted. Changes to the contract header are automatically copied to the
items if the header and item data were previously identical. Changes are saved in a log. The log also notes any possible problems and inconsistencies.
n You can maintain contract data at both the header and the item level in the sales document. Contract data at header level is valid for all items as long as the data at item level is not different.
n You can use the date determination rules so that the system automatically finds deadlines relevant to the contract.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 17
SAP AG 2003
Determining Dates
Proposal
RC - Create Contract
Contract Start: 08.07.2000
Contract End: 07.07.2001
Rule 05
Rule 08
Manual Entry
Installation Date: 08.07.2000
Contract Profile 0001
Contract start rule: 05
Contract end rule: 08
Duration: 1 year
Sales Doc. Type: RC
Contract Profile: 0001
Date Determination Rules:
01 - Today's date02 - Start of contract05 - Installation date08 - End of period12 - Start of contract + 1 week. . .
Cancellation proc.: 0001
IMG
IMG
n When you create a contract the system proposes, for example, the start and end dates of the contract. n You define the date determination rules in Customizing. These rules start the document on one of the
dates that you have set (for example, today's date or installation date). Any interval you specify can also be added to this date. You can also schedule the date for the beginning or end of the month that is determined in this manner.
n If you specify a duration category, the system automatically generates the duration of the contract. This can be a component of the date rule, for example, for determining the end of the contract.
n If you assign a contract profile to the sales document type, the system automatically determines default values specific to the contract. These could be: � Rules for determining start and end of the contract � Duration category � Subsequent activities � Cancellation procedure
(C) SAP AG SCM605 18
SAP AG 2003
Outline Agreements: Summary
You are now able to:
l Use different types of outline agreements and their functions
l Configure outline agreements in Customizing so that they meet your requirements
(C) SAP AG SCM605 19
Outline Agreements - Exercises
Unit: Outline Agreements
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Use outline agreements and configure their specific settings in Customizing
• Explain the concept of partners authorized to release
Outline agreements such as quantity, value or rental contracts play an important role in almost every branch of industry. Long-term agreements enable you to use forward planning and special pricing arrangements.
1-1 You have entered into a value contract with customer T-S62A## that is valid for 6 months. Create a contract and indicate the party authorized to release. The materials that are permitted for contract releases will be listed in an assortment module. The customer subsequently calls releases as orders. The system determines the permitted partners and materials for releases from the information stored in the value contract.
1-1-1 Create an assortment module for value contracts. The system assigns a number to the assortment module. You should then enter the description value contract module ## an. The module should be valid until the end of next year. List the materials T-ATB##, T-ATC## and T-ATD##.
Module number: _______________________________________
1-1-2 When the system automatically determines item categories, the item category for value contracts is determined by the usage indicator VCTR when an assortment module is specified.
Check in Customizing which item category has been found for sales document type WK1 Value contract – general.
Item category: _______________________________________
1-1-3 Display the item category.
Value contract material: _______________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 20
1-1-4 Create a value contract for customer T-S62A## with purchase order number ##LO605-WK101 and the description Value contract ##:
Order type: WK1 Sold-to party: Customer T-S62A## Authorized SH: Customer T-S62E## Authorized SH: Customer T-S62F##
Valid from: Today until 6 months from today Target value: 20,000 Euro Assortment module: see above
1-1-5 Create a release order for the value contract above with purchase order number ##LO605-OR11.
Order type: OR Releasing partner: Customer T-S62A## Ship-to party: Customer T-S62F##
Material: Material T-ATB## (1 unit) Material T-ATC## (1 unit)
1-1-6 Create a second release order with purchase order number ##LO605-OR12.
Order type: OR Releasing partner: Customer T-S62E## Ship-to party: Customer T-S62F##
Material: Material T-ATB## (10 units)
What message appears when you save? ______________________________________________________ Reduce the quantity to one unit and save.
1-1-7 Determine the total released value for the value contract. ____________________________________________________________
1-1-8 Check in the document flow to determine how many release orders exist for the contract. Total: _______________________________________
1-1-9 Optional
Where do you determine whether the value contract material should be transferred to the release order or not? ____________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 21
____________________________________________________________
1-1-10 Optional
Which item category settings do you use to control what happens when the target value in the contract is exceeded? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
1-1-11 Optional
Which partner determination procedure has been assigned to the value contract? ____________________________________________________________
1-1-12 Optional
Which partner functions for releasing partners are configured in this procedure? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
1-2 You have entered into a rental contract with customer T-S62D##.
1-2-1 Enter an outline agreement for customer T-S62D## with purchase order number ##LO605-OP01. Do not enter a sales area.
Which sales area was determined? __________________________________
1-2-2 When you create the rental contract, the system refers to the contract profile for essential contract data. Find the following contact data in the document:
Contract start date rule _________________________________ Contract end date rule _________________________________ Validity period category _________________________________ Contract validity period _________________________________ Cancellation procedure _________________________________
Note: The contract data appears on a separate tab page in the document header.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 22
Outline Agreements - Solutions
Unit: Outline Agreements
1-1 Value contracts and releases
1-1-1 Create an assortment module
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master data → Products → Value contract assortment module → Create → Button: Items → Enter Items → Save
Module number: _______________________________________
1-1-2 Check in Customizing which item category has been found for sales document type WK1 Value contract – general.
IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Contracts → Value Contract → Assign item category to…
Item category: WKN
1-1-3 Display the item category.
IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Contracts → Value Contract → Define item categories for value contract…→ Position on WKN
Value contract material: WKM1
1-1-4 Create a value contract
Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create:
Order type: WK1 Sold-to party: T-S62A##
→ Goto → Header → Partnersr
WE Contract release T-S62E## SH Contract rel. order: T-S62F## → return
(C) SAP AG SCM605 23
Valid from: Today until 6 months from today Target value: 20,000 UNI Assortment module: see above
1-1-5 Create a release contract for the value contract
Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create Order type: OR
Button: Create with reference → Contract tab Button: Selection List Select the releasing sold-to party and ship-to party in the dialog: Releasing sold-to party: T-S62A## Ship-to party: T-S62F##
→ in screen: Selection list for reference document → Button: Expand assortment module → Enter materials and quantities Material: T-ATB## (1 unit) Material: T-ATC## (1 unit) → Back Button: Copy → Save
1-1-6 Create a second release order
Menu paths: see above
Order type: OR Releasing partner: T-S62E## Ship-to party: T-S62F##
Material: T-ATA## (10 units)
What message appears when you save?
The target value of the contract has been exceeded.
Button: Edit
Reduce the quantity to one unit and save.
1-1-7 Determine the total released value for the value contract.
Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Contract → Display
Field: Released value: 6,097.00 EURO
1-1-8 Check in the document flow to see how many release orders exist for the contract.
→ Environment → Display document flow :
Total: 2
1-1-9 Optional
(C) SAP AG SCM605 24
Where do you determine whether the value contract material should be transferred to the release order or not?
→ In copying control at item level, at item level
IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Contracts → Value contract → Copying control for value contract Button: Position Target: OR Source: WK1 Dialog structure: Item Field: Contract item copy mode
1-1-10 Optional
Which item category settings do you use to control what happens when the target value in the contract is exceeded?
IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Contracts → Value Contract → Define item categories for value contract…→ Position on WKN
Information area: Business data Field: Completion rule Information area: Value contract Field: Contract release control
1-1-11 Optional
Which partner determination procedure has been assigned to the value contract?
IMG→ Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions→ Partner Determination → Set Up Partner Determination → Set Up Partner Determination for Customer Master → Partner Functions Folder (Double-click)
Sales Doc. Type: WK1 Partner determination procedure: KAB (Contract release)
1-1-12 Optional
Which partner functions for releasing partners are configured in this procedure?
→ Partner determination procedures folder (Double-click) → Select procedure KAB → Partner functions in procedure (Double-click)
Partner function: AA (SP Contract rel. ord.) Partner function: AW (SH Contract rel. ord.)
1-2 You have entered into a rental contract with customer T-S62D##.
1-2-1 Create a rental contract
(C) SAP AG SCM605 25
Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create Sales document type: RC Rental contract
Which sales area was determined?
1000 / 14 / 00
1-2-2 Find the following contract data in the rental contract:
Tab page: Header – Contract data
Contract start date rule Today’s date Contract end date Contract end + contract validity period Validity period category 1 year Contract validity period 1 year Cancellation procedure 0001 (Cancel.. at end of validity period)
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Material Determination and Listing / Exclusion
l Material determination and
l Product selection
l Material listing and
l Material exclusion
Unit Contents:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Material Determination: Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
l Use the functions for material determination and product selection as well as material listing and material exclusion
l Explain how to configure Customizing so that these functions meet your needs
l Create master records
l Understand and analyze the settings for these functions in the sales document
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Material Determination: Course Overview Diagram
XYZ/99M1 -?-
§
0,--ORORLFLFF2F2
7. Data flow8. Special Business
Transactions
9. Incompletion
12. Materialdetermination
2. Organizationalunits
4. Sales document type
11. Outlineagreements
13. Freegoods
6. Schedule line cat.
5. Item category
3. Sales Order Processing
10. Partnerdetermination
1. Introduction
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
Material Determination: Business Scenario
l Your company offers a wide range of products
l For various reasons, you want to regularly replace some products by others during the sales process
l In addition, you want to limit the product range available to certain customers
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 1999
Determining Materials
Material enteredMaterial entered Substitute material
Substitute material
OrderItem
10
Material
4711
M14711 M1
Determining materials
n Material determination provides you with a tool for automatically exchanging materials in the sales document.
n The condition technique provides you with greater flexibility in material determination. When you process a document, the system automatically searches for valid master records that you created previously in material determination.
n You can assign a substitution reason to every master record in material determination that defines how the material should be determined. You define the substitution rules in Customizing. Examples in the standard system include: � Substitution reason 0002: Customized material � Substitution reason 0003: EAN number
n You do not need a material master record for the material number that you are replacing. n During order entry, the material ordered by the customer is replaced by the substitute defined in the
master record. The system now continues processing with the substitute (for example, in the availability check, pricing, delivery, billing).
n Note: The item overview for Sales A contains information about the material that was originally entered as well as the reason for substitution.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 1999
Selecting Products Manually
CustomerCustomergroupgroup
WholesalersWholesalers
CustomerCustomerSmithSmith
1. 47142. 47113. 4712
Customer: MillerProduct: 4712
1. 47112. 47163. 4712
Customer: SmithProduct: 4711
1. 47122. 4716
Customer group: GHProduct: 4711
4711 4712 4713
4714 4715 4716
CustomerCustomerMillerMiller
MaterialsMaterials
Master records fordetermining materials
n In some sectors of industry, the same products are sold in different packaging materials (for example, packaging for standard and promotion articles). Material master records exist in the system for managing these stocks. When you enter an order, you can use different material numbers for the same product.
n We have extended the functions in manual and automatic product selection so that material determination can support this business practice: � Reason for substitution 0005: Manual production selection (list of default values) � Reason for substitution 0004 / 0006: Automatic product selection (depending on availability
in order and delivery) n In manual production selection, (reason for substitution 0005), the system does not automatically
replace the product. Instead, it displays a list of all of the substitution materials and other information in the master record. You can then select the required material from this list.
n To simplify selection, the system displays the material quantities that can be confirmed on the customer's requested delivery date. If a material cannot be confirmed fully for the requested delivery date, the system displays the date on which the material can be completely delivered.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 1999
Master Data
Product 4713
Product 4711
Product 471102/01 - 05/01
1. Easter version
2. Standard product
Product 4714
Product 4715
Product 4711
09/09 - 12/31
Product 4711
1. Olympic version
2. Christmas packaging
3. Standard product
For material determination/product selection
n Maintain the master records for material determination in the master data menu for Sales and Distribution under Products.
n You can use the condition technique to define the master data for material determination at any level. For example, you can create data records using the material number or a combination of the material and customer numbers.
n When you process master records, you can: � Restrict the validity period of a record � Maintain separate entries for each key combination � Determine reasons for substitution � Save one or more substitutes per master record
n If there is more than one material defined in the master record for material determination / product selection, the sequence in which they appear defines the priority that they have.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 1999
Automatic Product Selection
April 1AutomaticAutomaticselectionselection
Product 4712 10 PC
Product:l available
4711 10 PC0 PC
June 1AutomaticAutomaticselectionselectionProduct:
l available4711 10 PC
4 PC
Product 4711 4 PC
Product 4714 6 PC
Order
Delivery
n In automatic product selection (reasons for substitution 0004 and 0006), the system replaces the entered material automatically if it is not available.
n If automatic product selection is being used, the system may display (based on customizing) the entered and substituted material as main and sub-items in the sales order.
n When you enter an order, the system tries to fill the quantity of the order with the first material in the material determination master record. If there is not enough of this material, it fills the remaining quantity with the next material.
n You can choose whether or not you want to re-run material determination when the delivery is created. If material determination is re-run, the result of the substitution may change due to the new availability situation.
n You can use the product attributes in the material and customer master records to exclude a particular material from product selection. This means, for example, that all the materials that have been rejected in the customer master will not be included by the system when it determines a substitution material.
n The Partial confirmation of product selection allows you to deal with shortfall cases (in which only the available quantity is confirmed, and it is less than the order quantity) by passing the shortfall quantity on to materials planning. In this case, an additional sub-item is generated with a specifically defined material.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
SAP AG 1999
Automatic Product Selection - Master Data
1. A2. B
Examples
Material entered: AIf material A isn't available, it is automatically replacedwith material B.
II
1. D2. C
Material entered: CThe customer orders material C. You want to clear out material D.Material D is selected automatically as long asit is available.
IIII
Master records fordetermining materials
Master records fordetermining materials
n The sequence of the substitution materials in the master data influences the result of the automatic product selection in the order.
n If you want the material that is first entered in the order to be included in the substitution, then you must enter it in the substitutions list. � Case A: The original material is in the first place in the list, and its available stock is included in
the substitution. The system then refers to the available stock for the next material in the master record. � Case B: First, the system uses up the available stock for the materials that appear in the master
record before the material that has been entered. Only when these stocks have been used up, does it include that material in the substitution.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
SAP AG 1999
Material Determination - Condition Technique (1)
Sales doc. type OR
Order
Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1
Material : M-10. . .
Procedure A00001
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
SAP AG 1999
Material Determination - Condition Technique (2)
Sales doc. type OR Procedure A00001
Condition type A001
10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .Order
Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1
Material : M-10. . .
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
SAP AG 1999
Material Determination - Condition Technique (3)
Sales doc. type OR
. . .
Procedure A00001
Condition type A001
Access sequence A002
10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .
Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 12/31/2002
Order
Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1
Material : M-10. . .
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
SAP AG 1999
Material Determination - Condition Technique (4)
Sales doc. type OR
. . .
Procedure A00001
Condition type A001
Access sequence A002
Access:10 2 SlsOrg/DistCh/Ent.mat.
Access:20 1 Material entered
10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .
Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 12/31/2002
Order
Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1
Material : M-10. . .
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
SAP AG 1999
Material Determination - Condition Technique (5)
Sales doc. type OR
. . .
Procedure A00001
Condition type A001
Access sequence A002
Access:10 2 SlsOrg/DistCh/Ent.mat.
Access:20 1 Material entered
10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .
Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 01/01/2002
Table 2ð No record available
Table 1 ð Successful access
Order
Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1
Material : M-10. . .
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
SAP AG 1999
Material Determination - Condition Technique (6)
Sales doc. type OR
. . .
Procedure A00001
Condition type A001
Access sequence A002
Access:10 2 SlsOrg/DistCh/Ent.mat.
Access:20 1 Material entered
10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .
Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 01/01/2002
Table 2 ð No record available
Table 1 ð Successful access
Entry: MAT-10
Material determination master record
Valid from . . . To . . .Subst.reason: 0002
Substitution material: M-10
Order
Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1
Material : M-10. . .
n The condition technique provides more flexibility in modeling material determination and product selection.
n You can assign a material determination procedure to each sales document type. The procedure contains all of the Customizing information that the system needs for material determination. The procedure includes one or more defined condition types
n One access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type. n Each access sequence consists of one or more accesses. n Each access contains exactly one condition table. This represents the search key that the system uses
to search for a valid master record. n You can activate an analysis of the material determination in the sales document. The system then
displays detailed information on how the materials were determined.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
SAP AG 2003
Material Listing and Exclusion
Sold-To Party: S1
Item Material
10 471120 471330 4714
Master Records forMaterial Listing
Master Records forMaterial Listing
Customer: S1Materials:
47114712
OrderOrder
n You want to make sure that your customer only receives SPECIFIC materials. You enter these materials as a material listing.
n The material listing is controlled by the condition technique. n In the above example, you have created master records with a key for the customer and material
numbers. This key is delivered in the standard system. The access sequence for the condition type guarantees that the system searches for valid master records both for the sold-to party and the payer.
n You can also define your own keys, for example : � Customer group/material � Customer/product hierarchy
n You define in the sales document type whether the system checks the material listing or not. n You want to ensure that the customer does NOT receive certain materials. You enter these materials
as a material exclusion. The material exclusion is also controlled with the condition technique.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 17
SAP AG 1999
Material Determination: Summary
You are now able to:
l Use the functions for material determination and product selection as well as material listing and material exclusion
l Explain how to configure Customizing so that these functions meet your needs
l Create master records
l Understand and analyze the settings for these functions in the sales document
(C) SAP AG SCM605 18
Material Substitution and Lists Exercises
Unit: Material Determination / Product Selection and Material Listing / Material Exclusion
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Explain how to use the material determination and listing / exclusion functions
Customers often need to be able to change materials automatically. For example, they need to be able to substitute a standard product with a promotion material for a certain time period.
In order to avoid delivering the wrong goods, you can create master records where you list the permitted or forbidden materials.
1-1 Starting now, material T-ATA## should automatically replace material T-ATB## for a period of two months.
1-1-1 Create the relevant master record for material determination. Choose determination type A001.
1-1-2 Create a trade fair order (ZA##) order with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##09 for sold-to party T-S62A## and material T-ATB## (1 unit). Verify that the material is replaced automatically.
1-1-3 In which sales document view can you find information about the material entered (and if necessary the reason for substitution)?
View: _________________________________
1-2 You would like your employees in sales order processing to be able to call up a selection list for certain products, from which they can then choose a suitable material.
1-2-1 Create a reason for substitution Z## with the description Substitution ## in Customizing. Choose a substitution strategy that allows the selection list.
1-2-2 Enter a material determination master record with the description MONITOR## and reason for substitution Z##. The master record should
(C) SAP AG SCM605 19
contain the materials T-ATA##, T-ATB## and T-ATC##. The data record is valid for two months.
1-2-3 Enter a trade fair (ZA##) order with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##10 for sold-to party T-S62A##. Enter MONITOR## as the material with a quantity of 1 and check the effect on your master record.
1-3 A discussion between your sales department and customer T-S62B## reveals that the customer no longer allowed to purchase materials T-ATF## and T-ATG##.
1-3-1 Enter a condition record for the material exclusion.
1-3-2 Check the effect of this material master record by creating a trade fair order (ZA##) for customer T-S62B## with purchase order number ##605-ZA##11. Try to create an item with materials T-ATA## and T-ATF##.
Which item cannot be created and why?
____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
1-4 Optional
A discussion between the sales department and customer T-S62A## reveals that the customer can only use materials T-ATA##, T-ATB## and T-ATC## in production and therefore does not need any other products.
1-4-1 Enter a condition record for the material listing.
1-4-2 Check the effect of this material master record by creating a trade fair order (ZA##) for customer T-S62A## with purchase order number ##605-ZA##12. Try to create an item with materials T-ATA## and T-ATF##.
Which item cannot be created and why? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 20
Material Substitution and Lists Solutions
Unit: Material Determination / Product Selection and Material Listing / Material Exclusion
1-1 Starting now, material T-ATA## should automatically replace material T-ATB## for a period of two months.
1-1-1 Material master for material determination
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Products à Material Determination à Create Material determination type: A001
Entered Material: T-ATB## Material: T-ATA## à Save à Exit
Note: The validity period of the master record was proposed from the Customizing of condition type A001.
1-1-2 Order
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create
1-1-3 In which sales document view can you find information about the material entered (and if necessary the reason for substitution)?
View: Item details: Sales A, Field: Entered material
1-2 Manual product selection from a selection list
1-2-1 Substitution reason:
IMG àSales and Distribution àBasic Functions à Material Determination à Define substitution reasons
Button: New entries Reason for substitution: Z## Description: Substitution ## Strategy: A à Save à Exit
1-2-2 Material master for material determination
(C) SAP AG SCM605 21
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Products à Material determination à Create
Material determin. type: A001
Entered mat.: MONITOR## Material: T-ATA## Reason: Z##
à Select entry à Goto à Alternative materials à Enter additional materials à Save à?Exit
1-2-3 Order
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create
1-3 Material exclusion
1-3-1 Master record for material exclusion
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Products à Lists/Exclusion à Create
List /Excl. type: B001
Customer: T-S62B## ?à Maintain materials à Save à Exit
1-3-2 Order
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create
Which item cannot be created and why?
Material T-ATF## cannot be entered in the document. Message: Material T-ATF## has been excluded.
1-4 Optional
Material listing
1-4-1 Master record for material listing
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Products à Lists/Exclusion à Create
List /Excl. type: A001 à Key combination: Customer/ material
Customer: T-S62A## ?à Maintain materials à Save à Exit
(C) SAP AG SCM605 22
1-4-2 Order
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create
Which item cannot be created and why?
Material T-ATF## cannot be entered in the document. Message: Material T-ATF## is not listed and therefore not allowed.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Free Goods
l Exclusive and inclusive bonus quantities
l Master data
l Free goods condition technique
l Free goods in statistics and Controlling
Unit Contents:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Free Goods: Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
l Use the free goods functions in your sales process
l Enter master records for exclusive and inclusive bonus quantities
l Explain how to configure the Customizing settings for free goods
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Free Goods: Course Overview Diagram
XYZ/99M1 -?-
§
ORORLFLFF2F2
7. Data flow8. Special Business
Transactions
9. Incompletion
12. Materialdetermination
2. Organizationalunits
4. Sales document type
11. Outlineagreements
13. Freegoods
6. Schedule line cat.
5. Item category
3. Sales Order Processing
10. Partnerdetermination
1. Introduction
0,--
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
Free Goods: Business Scenario
l Free goods play a large role in the price negotiations with your customers.
l As a result, you want to be able to determine free goods and place them in the sales documents automatically.
l Your responsibility is to automate the determination of free goods, taking into account that certain information related to the free goods has to be supplied to Controlling.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 1999
Inclusive BQ
One free cart
on
of these
Exclusive and Inclusive Bonus Quantities (1)
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 1999
Exclusive and Inclusive Bonus Quantities (2)
+Exclusive BQInclusive BQ
One free cart
on
of these
n In industry sectors such as retail, the chemicals industry or consumer goods industry, it is common to provide discounts in the form of free goods.
n Free goods can be part of the order quantity not included in the invoice. This is called an inclusive bonus quantity. The ordered goods and the free goods both involve the same material. The quantity units of the free goods and ordered goods must be the same.
n Free goods can also take the form of extra goods that are free of charge. These are called exclusive bonus quantities.
n In exclusive bonus quantities, the extra goods are delivered free of charge and are not typically included in the invoice. This can either be an additional quantity of the goods ordered or it can be another article.
n The exclusive free goods appear in the SD document as an individual, free-of-charge item.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 1999
Free Goods in the Sales Order
Order
Sold-to party: C2
Pricing date: May 8
Delivery date: May 15
Item HI Material Quant. ICat
10 Eggs 4 TAN
20 10 Eggs 1 TANN
Item HI Material Quant. ICat
10 Eggs 5 TAN
20 10 Duck 1 TANN
Exclusive BQOrder
Inclusive BQ
Sold-to party: C1
Pricing date: May 8
Delivery date: May 15
n Both types of free goods are treated in the same way in the sales order. The material that has been ordered is entered as a main item, the free goods material is automatically displayed as a sub-item.
n The item category determines how the the item is controlled later in the business process (for example, for delivery or pricing). Item categories TAN and TANN are used in the standard SAP system. The system determines them automatically by accessing the relevant condition records. The system then accesses the free goods master record with the pricing date.
n As in earlier releases, you can also enter free goods by manually entering data in the higher-level item and item category fields (TANN). However in this case, the system does not refer to the free goods master record, and settings such as automatically reducing the quantity of the main item or for the delivery are missing.
n The system re-reads the free goods master record in the sales order if the quantities in the main item change or if the pricing date changes. The system then deletes the sub-items and re-creates them. Any manual changes to the free goods quantity are lost.
n If pricing is re-run in the sales order, it does not affect the free goods determination.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 1999
Free Goods - Master Data
30
SlsOrg DistChan Cust. Material
1000 10 C1 M1
Valid from: July 1 To: October 30
Material Min. At/From Adit. in % ReR LAdd. quantity D
M1 Eggs 20 9 CAR 1 PC 10 1 EM2 Duck 2 Addition
n The condition technique is used for free goods. Free goods are generally regarded as a supplement to the pricing agreement for a material.
n You maintain the free goods in the master records for sale s by: � Using a different menu entry � Going to Prices and Discounts/surcharges when maintaining the master records
n You can define master records for free goods at any level, for example, material, customer / material, price list category / currency / material or customer hierarchy / material.
n You can restrict master records for one level in many different ways: � Validity period: The condition is only valid within this period � Lowest quantity: The condition comes into affect when this quantity has been exceeded � Delivery control: See next page � Calculation type: See following page � Scales
n You can process different master data with the same key for inclusive and exclusive bonus quantities are the same time. You only need to press a button to switch between the two types of discount.
n When you enter an exclusive bonus quantity, an extra entry line appears where you can enter the good if it is not the same as the ordered material.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
SAP AG 1999
Free Goods - Calculation Rule
l Rule 1: Prorated
l Rule 2: Related to units
l Rule 3: Whole units
l Rule ##: Your own rule
n When you specify a calculation rule, you decide how the system determines the free goods quantity from the additional and document quantities. � The free goods quantity is the quantity that is calculated from the discount quantity (not the
minimum quantity). � The additional quantity is the quantity delivered free-of-charge. � The document quantity is the quantity entered by the person creating the sales order.
n Three calculation rules are provided in the standard system. The following example describes how they work:
You offer supply 20 units of free goods for a free goods quantity of 100 units. The customer orders 162 units (document quantity). � Rule 1 prorated: 32 units free goods [ 162*(20/100) = rounded down ] � Rule 2 unit-related: 20 units free goods [ 100*(20/100) = rounded down ] � Rule 3 whole units: 0 units free goods [ 162 is not a complete unit of 100]
n Calculation rules are stored in the system in the form of ABAP/4 code. You can also define your own rules (transaction VOFM, under menu entry, formulas).
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
SAP AG 1999
Free Goods - Statistics and Controlling
QuantityPriceDiscountVPRSRevenue Sales ded. CostsCO
SD
Examples for Transferring Information to CO-PA
10 1100
40 5100
40 5
MI SI
SAPStandard
1
10 1100 20
- 2040 5
100 20- 20
40 5
MI SI
TANN• Pricing:B• FG100 w/
req. 55
2
10 1100
45 ß100
45
MI SI
LF ⇒ F1TANN• No pricing
3
n You can see detailed information about free goods in the Profitability Analysis and Statistics. n The revenues, sales deductions and costs of free goods can be transferred to Profitability Analysis
(CO-PA) in different ways, shown in the examples below. (MIt = main item, SIt = sub-item) � Scenario 1 (SAP standard system)
MIt : Not influenced by free goods SIt: Pricing de-activated, calculation price (VPRS) configured as costs. � Scenario 2
MIt : Not influenced by free goods SIt: Pricing for item category TANN active with setting B (in the costing procedure, condition type FG100 calculates a 100% discount through requirement 55 at level 819), discount reduces revenues, the transfer price is set as the costs. � Scenario 3
MIt : Cumulation of calculation price for lower-level item configured at main item level (in copying control Delivery -> Billing document), accumulated clearing price set as costs,SIt: Pricing deactivated
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
SAP AG 1999
Free Goods - Condition Technique
Table 05 ⇒ No record availableTable 10 ⇒ Successful access
Sales area 1000 10 00Doc. procedure ACust. procedure 1
10 1 NA00 Free goods. . .
Access seq. Valid from To
Access:10 05 Material
Access:20 10 SlsOrg/DistCh/Cust./Mat.
1000 10 C1 M1 ... ... ... ... ... ...
Order
1
2
Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1
Main item TAN
Sub-item TANN
Condition records
Access sequence NA00
Condition type NA00
Procedure NA0001
n The condition technique provides greater flexibility for using the free goods functions. n The system uses the information about the sales areas, document determination procedure (from the
sales document type) and customer determination procedure (from the customer master) to determine the free goods determination procedure.
n The procedure contains a list of the condition types for the free goods. n One access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type. Each access sequence
consists of one or more accesses. n Each access contains exactly one condition table. This represents the search key that the system uses
to search for a valid master record. n If the search is successful, the system generates a sub-item for the free goods in the document. The
item category is assigned with the item category usage FREE. n Pricing for both items is controlled with the item category as normal. n You can activate an analysis of the free goods determination in the sales document. The system then
displays detailed information on how the free goods were determined.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
SAP AG 1999
Free Goods: Unit Summary
You are now able to:
l Use the free goods functions in your sales process
l Enter master records for exclusive and inclusive bonus quantities
l Explain how to configure the Customizing settings for free goods
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
Free Goods - Exercises
Unit: Free Goods
At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:
• Create different master records for free goods
• Explain how free goods affect the sales process
• Describe how to control the free goods
2.
You can extend pricing by using free goods in the form of exclusive and inclusive bonus quantities.
You make the relevant agreements with your customer.
These will be automatically controlled by the R/3 System in the document when you enter a sales order.
1-1 You have agreed on a price reduction for customer T-S62A## in the form of free goods.
1-1-1 Create a free goods master record (free goods type NA00) for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10. If the customer orders at least 20 units of material T-ATC##, 10% of the purchased quantity should be free of charge. The free-of charge material should be a proportion of the quantity in the higher- level item.
1-1-2 Create a trade fair order (ZA##) with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##13 for customer T-S62A## and Material T-ATC##. The purchase order quantity is 10 units.
What message appears? ____________________________________________________________
1-1-3 Increase the quantity to 40 units. What are the quantities in the higher- level and sub- items?
Main item: _______________________________________ Subitem: _______________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
1-2 You make another free goods agreement with customer T-S62E## for material T-ATD##. The minimum order quantity is 20 units. You want to deliver one free-of-charge unit of material T-ATA## for each 20 units ordered.
1-2-1 Create the relevant master record for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10.
1-2-2 In the record, indicate that the system only determines the quantity of the free-of-charge material in multiples of the free goods quantity.
1-2-3 Create a trade fair order (ZA##) with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##14 for customer T-S62E## and Material T-ATD##. The purchase order quantity is 40 units.
1-3 Optional The system automatically created a free goods sub- item for the order with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##14. The system runs pricing for this sub- item even though it is free of charge.
1-3-1 Which item category did the system find for the sub- item and which key did it use? Item category: _______________________________________ Key: _______________________________________
1-3-2 Which settings in Customizing affect pricing for the free-of-charge item? ____________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
Free Goods - Solutions
Unit: Free Goods
1-1 You have agreed on a price reduction for customer T-S62A## in the form of free goods.
1-1-1 Master record for free goods
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Conditions à Free goods à Create
Type of free goods NA00
Customer: T-S62A##
Material: T-ATC## Minimum quantity: 20 From: 10 Unit of measure: ST are free goods: 1 Unit of measure: PC Calculation type (CalT): 1 Delivery control (L): blank à Save à Exit
Note: The validity period of the master record was proposed from the Customizing of condition type A001.
1-1-2 Order
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create
What message appears?
Minimum quantity of 20 PC of free goods has not been reached.
1-1-3 Increase the quantity to 40 units. What are the quantities in the higher-level and sub-items?
Main item: 36 units Sub-item: 4 units
1-2 You make another free goods agreement with customer T-S62E## for material T-ATD##.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
1-2-1 Master record
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Conditions à Free goods à Create
Type of free goods NA00
Button: Exclusive BQ
Customer: T-S62E##
Material: T-ATD## Minimum quantity: 20 Free goods qty: 20 Unit of measure: ST Additional free goods: 1 Unit of measure: PC Additional material: T-ATA##
1-2-2 Calculation type
Calculation type (CalT): 2
1-2-3 Order
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create
1-3 Optional Pricing for free goods
1-3-1 Which item category did the system find for the sub-item and which key did it use?
Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create
Item category: TANN
IMG à Sales and Distribution à Basic Functions à Free Goods à Determine item category for the free goods item
Key: ZA## / NORM / FREE /TAN
1-3-2 Which settings in Customizing affect pricing for the free-of-charge item?
IMG à Sales and Distribution à Basic Functions à Free Goods à Control Free Goods Pricing à? Control pricing for free goods item category…
à Item category: Pricing: B Pricing Free goods (100% discount)
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Introduction: Summary
§§
0,--ORORLFLFF2F2
7. Data flow8. Special Business
Transactions
9. Incompletion
12. Materialdetermination
2. Organizationalunits
4. Sales document type
11. Outlineagreements
13. Freegoods
6. Schedule line cat.
5. Item category
1. Introduction
3. Sales Order Processing
10. Partnerdetermination
XYZ/99XYZ/99M1M1 -?--?-
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Course Objectives
You are now able to:
l Describe how sales fits into the SD process chain
l Configure Customizing so that it represents your specific sales requirements
l Adjust and use Help within the system
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Recommended Follow-Up Activities
l Go through the exercises using IDES data or your own data
l Read on-line documentation
l Read IMG documentation
l Read release notes
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
LO606 Sales Support
SAP AG
LO606LO606
Sales WorkshopSales Workshop
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG
R
Contents
Scenario 3 Material Determination
Scenario 4 Bills of Materials
Scenario 1 Sales to Employees
Scenario 2 Service Orders
Preface
Exercises
Solutions
Appendix
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
Data Used in the Exercises
To get the maximum benefit from the exercises, we recommend that you only use the data below:
Master data
Training system
Comments IDES Data
Scenario
Customer Search term
MA## MA## One-time customer 100016 Sales to employees
T-L63A## ##LO606-01 Normal customer 2006 Service order / Material determination
T-L63B## ##LO606-02 Special customer 2007 Material determination
T-L63C## ##LO606-03 Additional ship-to party: T-L63B##
2006 Material determination
T-L63D## ##LO606-04 2006 Bill of material
Material Old material no.
(Trading goods (HAWA)/ Branch: M)
T-ATM## ##LO606-01
M-11 Sales to employees
T-ATN## ##LO606-02 M-12 Sales to employees
T-ATO## ##LO606-03 M-10 Service order
T-ATP## ##LO606-04 Service material I-1000 Service order
T-ATQ## ##LO606-05 Preceding model; Availability: 02
M-15
Material determination
T-ATR## ##LO606-06 Subsequent model M-15 Material determination
T-ATS## ##LO606-07 PC main item R-1001 Bill of material
T-ATT## ##LO606-08 Component: basic equipment
R-1170 Bill of material
T-ATU## ##LO606-09 Component: processor M-13 Bill of material
T-ATV## ##LO606-10 Component: main memory
M-14 Bill of material
T-ATW## ##LO606-11 Component: monitor M-15 Bill of material
Personnel
1701## Employee 1 1701 Service order
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG
R
Sales to Employees
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG
R
Sales Sales to to EmployeesEmployees - Business Background
Company employees are often able to buy goods from their company at reduced prices.
In the following scenario, it is your job to create this process for your company - IDES. IDES has set up its own shop where employees can purchase the products at reduced rates.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG
R
Sales to EmployeesSales to Employees - Orders
The employee takes the goods from the shelves and pays in
cash.
The employee takes the goods
immediately.
Invoice
Cust.: MA##
1000 / 10 / 00
10 PC 1 pc
Inv. No.: 5718
The employee receives an invoice.
The delivery is created automatically.
n The goods offered to employees at a reduced price can be obtained from a special shop set up for employees.
n Employees select their goods, take them from the shelves and go to the checkout. Since employees can only buy the goods that are in the shop, an availability check and transfer of requirements are not necessary.
n You should not create any orders without a net value. This prevents documents without items or with free items from being created in the system.
n No individual customer master data for employees has been maintained in the system. Employee orders are processed using a collective master record (one-time customer account).
n Employees generally receive a discount of 15% off the material price. Some materials can have a higher discount.
n As soon as the employee has paid, they are given an invoice which serves as a receipt. n The employee takes the goods away immediately.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG
R
Sales to Employees Sales to Employees - Delivery
.
Picking is not required. Goods issue is automatically posted.
Delivery
Cust: MA##
1000 10 00
10 PC 1 pc
Del. No.:80002451
The delivery is created automatically.
X
n The system automatically creates the delivery once the sales document has been saved. n Picking is not necessary, as the employees can only buy goods which are available in the shop. n Goods issue can be posted manually for a single delivery, or automatically in the background at the
end of each day.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG
R
Sales to EmployeesSales to Employees - Billing Document
Invoice
Cust: MA##
1000 10 00
10 PC 1PC
Inv. no.: 9005718
An invoice has already been createdso it does not need to be re-printed.
Invoice9005718
Tocompany ?? X
n Because the goods are delivered as soon as the order has been saved, the order quantity is always the same as the goods issue quantity. This means that the billing document can be order-related.
n Billing documents are created automatically and collectively by running the billing list, for example, during night-time processing.
n In the financial accounting document, the billed amount is posted to a special cash sales account. There are no receivables for the customer.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG
R
SalesSales to to EmployeesEmployees - Tasks
l Create a new sales document type for sales to employees
l Define a new item category for the order and delivery
l Configure the important fields in the incompletion log for processing sales to employees
l Create a customer master record for one-time customers
l Extend pricing to include employees
l Create an output master record for the invoice
l Test sales to employees in the system
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
Scenario: Sales to Employees
• Create a new document type
• Generate a new item category
• Set up a new customer master record
• Set up pricing controls
• Set up output controls
• Set up the incompletion log
• Test the process
Your company produces computers that the employees can buy in the company shop at either cost price or at a reduced rate for employees. They have to pay in cash and take their purchases with them straight away. The employee then receives an invoice for a cash sale.
Goods issue is posted and billing documents are created automatically in collective processing, for example, at the end of the day.
1-1 Sales document type Create a sales document type for ZB## SE##-Sales.
1-1-1 To do this, copy the CS Cash Sales order type. Ensure that all related table entries are copied. Send the log of all the copied table entries to your office inbox. Save the new entry. Branch to your office inbox. Call up the log.
1-1-2 Set up the new document type so that during document processing, the Items Overview tab page follows the initial screen.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
1-1-3 A wide range of checks and functions can be activated in the sales document type, such as checking for open contracts or searching for customer-material info records. These checks take place in document processing and therefore affect system performance. Ensure that all the checks and functions you don't need have been de-activated.
1-1-4 Which entry prevents the user from saving incomplete documents? ________________________________________________________________
1-1-5 What affect does the entry in the Shipping conditions field have? ________________________________________________________________
1-1-6 Which entry causes a delivery to be created automatically when the sales document is saved? ________________________________________________________________
1-1-7 Which entry ensures that the current date is automatically used as the requested delivery date? ________________________________________________________________
1-1-8 What is the document type for the delivery? ________________________________________________________________
1-1-9 Check that the document is assigned to sales area 1000 10 00.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
1-2 Item category in the sales and delivery docume nts Create an item category for the sales to employees document type so that the item controls do not have to be the same as for cash sales.
1-2-1 Create a new item category BV## by copying the item category BVN. The description for the new item category should be BV##-Item. Use the settings from the original item category.
1-2-2 The log for this copying transaction documents all the table entries that have been copied. Use the log to check that the copy included item category BV## for the delivery (table TVLP: Delivery item categories).
1-2-3 Make sure that item category BV## is automatically determined for materials with item category group NORM in sales document type ZB##.
1-2-4 Change item category BV## for deliveries. Picking is not needed because the goods that are bought are already in the employee shop. Therefore, de-activate the Relevant for picking field for item category BV## of the delivery.
1-3 Incompletion Create a new incompletion procedure at header level.
1-3-1 Copy the incompletion procedure that controls the document type BV. Key: 60+## Description: SE##-Sales header
1-3-2 Change the new incompletion log: – Remove the entry for the purchase order number. – To stop the system from creating free-of-charge documents, add the Net value of the order field. – Copy the Sales office field.
1-3-3 Assign the procedure to sales document type ZB##. Make sure that incompletion documents cannot be saved.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
1-4 Customer master record The employees have to be saved in the system as customers so that you can create orders for them. During project planning, it was decided that an individual customer master record is not needed for each employee. Instead, a collective master record (one-time customer account) can be used for employee sales.
1-4-1 Create a customer master record accordingly: – Customer: SE## – Company code: 1000 IDES AG – Sales area: 1000 10 00 – Account group: CPDA Reference: – Customer: 100016 – Company code: 1000 IDES AG – Sales area: 1000 10 00 → Address screen: – Name: Sales employee ## – Search term: SE## → Sales screen: – Sales office: 1000 Frankfurt – Country: DE – Language key Language of the course → Billing screen: – Incoterms: CPT – Payment terms: 0001 – Tax classification: 1
1-5 Pricing Your sales manager has decided that each employee may receive a basic discount of 15%.
1-5-1 Maintain a master record for customer-dependent discount (K007 customer discount) of 15%.
1-5-2 Optional Better discounts are also available for certain materials. Check whether the access sequence K007 contains an access (customer/material) and, if necessary, supplement this with an exclusive access with sequential number 05 and condition table 005. Maintain a discount of 20 % for the new discount. Customer: SE##
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
Material: T-ATN##
1-6 Printing the invoice The system should print the invoice automatically as soon as the sales document has been saved.
1-6-1 Create an output master data record. Use output type RD03. The output has been configured so that it is sent to the bill-to party. Set up the master record so that output is printed as soon as the document has been saved.
1-6-2 Maintain the following communication data for the output: Output device: LP01 Print immediately: activate Release after output: activate Number of messages: 1
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
1-7 Sales to employees Test your settings by trying to create a sale to an employee.
1-7-1 Create a sale to an employee. Customer: SE## (Enter any address) In which overview tab page does the system start document processing? ____________________________________________________________ What are the Incoterms? ____________________________________________________________ What are the terms of payment? ____________________________________________________________ Can you save the document and why? ____________________________________________________________
1-7-2 Enter the following two items Material: T-ATM## (1 piece) Material: T-ATN## (1 piece) What discounts does the system find for material T-ATM##? Analyze pricing. ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Optional Which discount does the system find for material T-ATN##? Does it find the greater discount for material T-ATN##? Analyze pricing. ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
1-7-3 Which item categories did the system find for the items in the sales document? ____________________________________________________________
1-7-4 Save the order. Does the system automatically create a delivery? ____________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
1-7-5 Check whether the system automatically printed the output when you saved the sales document. ____________________________________________________________ Display the output on your screen.
1-7-6 What type of delivery has been created? ____________________________________________________________ Which item category does the system find for the delivery items? ____________________________________________________________ Post goods issue.
1-7-7 Create a billing document for the transaction. ____________________________________________________________ Which document does the billing document refer to? ____________________________________________________________ Where is this set in Customizing? ____________________________________________________________ What is the billing document type? ____________________________________________________________ Check the accounting document. To which accounts were the incoming payments posted? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
1-7-8 Did the system automatically determine an output in the billing document for printing the invoice? Why? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
1-7-9 Look at the document flow for the whole process. Check the overal processing status of the individual documents.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
Scenario: Sales to Employees
• Create a new document type
• Define a new item category
• Set up a new customer master record
• Set up pricing controls
• Set up output controls
• Set up the incompletion log
• Test the process
Your company produces computers that the employees can buy in the company shop at either cost price or at a reduced rate for employees. They have to pay in cash and take their purchases with them. The employee then receives an invoice for a cash sale.
Goods issue is posted and billing documents are created automatically in collective processing, for example, at the end of the day.
1-1 Sales document type Create a sales document type for ZB## with description SE##-Sales.
1-1-1 To do this, copy the CS Cash Sales order type. Ensure that all related table entries are copied. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header → Define sales document types → Select sales document type CS → Choose "Copy as" Key: ZB## Description: SE##-Sales Send the log of all the copied table entries to your office inbox. → System → List → Send → Recipient: LO606-##
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
Save the new entry. Branch to your office inbox. Call up the log. → Office → Inbox → Office unviewed → Double-click on the log
1-1-2 Set up the new document type so that during document processing, the Items Overview tab page follows the initial screen. FCODE for overview screen field: UER2
1-1-3 A wide range of checks and functions can be activated in the sales document type, such as checking for open contracts or searching for customer-material info records. These checks take place in document processing and therefore affect system performance. Ensure that all the checks and functions you don't need have been de-activated. You can de-activate the following checks: – Credit limit – Check purchase order number – Commitment date – Open quotations, outline agreements and group master contracts messages – Product attribute messages – Payment cards
1-1-4 Which entry prevents the user from saving incomplete documents? The "Incomplet. messages" field is activated.
1-1-5 What affect does the entry in the Shipping conditions field have? See F1 Help for the field.
1-1-6 Which entry causes a delivery to be created automatically when the sales document is saved? "Immediate delivery" has been activated.
1-1-7 Which entries ensure that the current date is automatically used as the requested delivery date? – The "Lead time in days" field is empty. – The "Propose deliv. Date" field is activated.
1-1-8 What is the document type for the delivery? Delivery type BV
(C) SAP AG SCM605 17
1-1-9 Check that the document is assigned to sales area 1000 10 00. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header → Assign sales area to sales document types → Assign sales order types permitted for sales areas
1-2 Item category in the sales and delivery documents Create an item category for the sales to employees document type so that the item controls do not have to be the same as for cash sales.
1-2-1 Create a new item category BV## by copying the item category BVN. The description for the new item category should be BV##-Item. Use the settings from the original item category. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories → Select item category BVN → Choose "Copy as" Key: BV## Description: BV##-item
1-2-2 The log for this copying transaction documents all the table entries that have been copied. Use the log to check that the copy included item category BV## for the delivery (table TVLP: Delivery item categories). Entry: In the "Allocation of delivery item categories table (TVLP )", copy: PSTY BV##
(C) SAP AG SCM605 18
1-2-3 Make sure that item category BV## is automatically determined for materials with item category group NORM in sales document type ZB##. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories → Choose "Position" Sales doc. type: ZB## Item cat. group: NORM Item usage: blank Item cat.-Higher level item: blank Default Item Category (DfHC): BV## (Overwrite BVN) → Choose "Details" → Delete any alternative item categories
1-2-4 Change item category BV## for deliveries. Picking is not needed because the goods that are bought are already in the employee shop. Therefore, de-activate the Relevant for picking field for item category BV## of the delivery. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Shipping → Deliveries → Define item categories for deliveries → Select BV## → Choose "Details" → De-activate the "Relevant for picking" field
1-3 Incompletion Create a new incompletion procedure at header level. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Incompletion control for sales documents
1-3-1 Copy the incompletion procedure that controls the document type BV. → Assign incompletion procedures → Assign procedures to sales document types → Procedure 11→ Exit → Define incompletion procedures → Select incompletion group A → Choose "Procedures" → Choose "Change" → Select procedure 11 → Choose "Copy as" Key: 60+## Description: SE##-Sales header → Copy all entries
1-3-2 Change the new incompletion log:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 19
→ Select new procedure 60+## → Choose "Fields" – Remove the entry for the purchase order number. → Select the entry → Choose "Delete" – To stop the system from creating free-of-charge documents, add the Net value of the order field. → Choose "New entries" Table: VBAK Field name: NETWR Screen: leave blank Status: 01 Warning: leave blank – Add the Sales office field. Table: VBAK Field name: VKBUR Screen: KKAU Status: 01 Warning: leave blank Note: You can use any status group because incomplete documents cannot be saved (incompletion control was activated in the document type SE##).
1-3-3 Assign the procedure to sales document type ZB##. → Exit → Assign incompletion procedures → Assign procedures to sales document types ZB## → Procedure 60+## Make sure that incomplete documents cannot be saved. → Activate the "Incompletion messages" field
(C) SAP AG SCM605 20
1-4 Customer master record The employees have to be saved in the system as customers so that you can create orders for them. During project planning, it was decided that an individual customer master record is not needed for each employee. Instead, a collective master record (one-time customer account) can be used for employee sales.
1-4-1 Create a customer master record accordingly: Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Business partners → Sold-to party → Create → Create centrally – Customer: SE## – Company code: 1000 IDES AG – Sales area: 1000 10 00 – Account group: CPDA Reference: – Customer: 100016 – Company code: 1000 IDES AG – Sales area: 1000 10 00 → Address screen: – Name: Sales employee ## – Search term: SE## → Sales screen: – Sales office: 1000 Frankfurt – Country: DE – Language key Language of the course → Billing screen: – Incoterms: CPT – Payment terms: 0001 – Tax classification: 1
1-5 Pricing Your sales manager has decided that each employee may receive a basic discount of 15%.
1-5-1 Maintain a master record for customer-dependent discount (K007 customer discount) of 15%. → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Conditions → Discounts/surcharges → Others → Create → Enter condition type K007
(C) SAP AG SCM605 21
→ Choose "Key combination" → Select "Division/customer"
1-5-2 Optional Better discounts are also available for certain materials. Check whether the access sequence K007 contains an access (customer/material) and, if necessary, supplement this with an exclusive access with sequential number 05 and condition table 005. → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Conditions → Discounts/surcharges → Others → Create → Enter condition type K007 → Choose "Key combination" → Select "Customer/material" Maintain a discount of 20 % for the new discount. Customer: SE## Material: T-ATN##
1-6 Printing the invoice The system should print the invoice automatically as soon as the sales document has been saved.
1-6-1 Create an output master data record. Use output type RD03. → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Output → Sales document → Create → Enter output type RD03 The output has been configured so that it is sent to the bill-to party. Set up the master record so that output is printed as soon as the document has been saved. Sales doc type: ZB## Partner function: BP Time: 4
1-6-2 Maintain the following communication data for the output: → Choose "Communication" Output device: LP01 Print immediately: activate Release after output: activate Number of messages: 1
(C) SAP AG SCM605 22
1-7 Sales to employees Test your settings by trying to create a sale to an employee. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create → Enter order type ZB##
1-7-1 Create a sale to an employee. Customer: SE## (Enter any address) → Enter address information In which overview tab page does the system start document processing? Item overview What are the Incoterms? → Sales tab page → CPT (from the customer master record) What are the terms of payment? → Sales tab page → 0001 (from customer master record) Can you save the document and why? No. You haven't entered any items so the net value of the document is zero. Because the "Incompletion messages" indicator was activated, you cannot save an incomplete document.
1-7-2 Enter the following two items Material: T-ATM## (1 piece) Material: T-ATN## (1 piece) What discounts does the system find for material T-ATM##? Analyze pricing. → Select item 10 → Choose "Pricing" → Select "CnTy" (condition type) K007 Item 10 qualifies for a 15% discount. → Choose "Analysis"→ Select "K007" → Choose "Details"→ Access 05 Condition record is missing → Access 10 Condition record has been found → Select "Access 10" → Choose "Details" → System displays the complete access key with material and division Optional Which discount does the system find for material T-ATN##? Does it find the
(C) SAP AG SCM605 23
greater discount for material T-ATN##? Analyze pricing. → Leave analysis → Choose "Next item" → Select "CnTy" (condition type) K007 Item 10 qualifies for a 20% discount. → Choose "Analysis"→ Select "K007" → Choose "Details"→ Access 05 Condition record has been found → Access 10 Condition record exists (deleted manually) → Select "Access 10" → Choose "Details" → System displays the complete access key with material and division
1-7-3 Which item categories did the system find for the items in the sales document? → Goto → Overview → Scroll to the right in the table → Item category: BV##
1-7-4 Save the order. Does the system automatically create a delivery? → Yes. Message in the status bar: SE##-Sales #### has been saved (Delivery #### created) Order number:___________ Delivery number:______________
1-7-5 Check whether the system automatically printed the output when you saved the sales document. → Display sales document → Extras → Output → Header → green traffic light = successfully processed Display the output on your screen. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Display → Sales document → Issue output to → Screen → Choose "Execute" → Choose "Execute".
1-7-6 What type of delivery has been created? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Shipping → Delivery → Display → Header → General header data BV document type Which item category does the system find for the delivery items? → Back (F3) → Scroll right in the table → BV## Post goods issue.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 24
→ Edit → Post goods issue
1-7-7 Create a billing document for the transaction. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document → Create → Choose "Execute" Which document does the billing document refer to? The sales document Where is this set in Customizing? In item category BV## Billing-relevant indicator: B What is the billing document type? → See title bar of the screen for the billing document type Billing type: BV Billing document number:________________________ Check the accounting document. To which accounts were the incoming payments posted? → Billing document → Change → Choose "Accounting" → Choose "Accounting" → Select accounting document → Choose "Details" → Account number: 100 000 Petty cash 800 000 Sales revenue 888 000 Sales deductions
1-7-8 Did the system automatically determine an output in the billing document for printing the invoice? Why? → Billing document → Display → Header → Output No. As soon as the order was saved, an invoice was printed and given to the customer.
1-7-9 Look at the document flow for the whole process. Check the overal processing status of the individual documents. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Display → Environment → Display document flow
(C) SAP AG SCM605 25
→ Select each document → Choose "Status overview " Order: Completed Delivery: Completed Invoice_ Completed
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG
R
Bills of Materials
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG
R
Bills of Bills of Materials Materials - Business Background
Several materials can often be sold together as sets or packages. These are stored in the R/3 System as bills of materials (BOMs). Each separate material in the bill can be configured individually.
Your company, IDES specializes in combining PC packages to meet the customer’s individual requirements. The individual components are not ordered until the customer places an actual order. It is your job to create the settings for these packages.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG
R
Bills of Bills of Materials Materials - Requirements
Order
Customer: 2738Order no.: 5718Sales area: 1000/10/00
110 Basic equip. 1 120 Processor 1 130 Memory 4140 Monitor 1 200 Monitor 2
100 PC package 1
Prices?
Purchaseorder?
Delivery note?
Availability?
Transfer of requirements?
n You are a specialist in selling PCs configured according to the individual customer’s requirements. n The components are obtained from a distributor who is in contact with the producers in the Far East. n The components are only ordered from the distributors once the customer has placed an order. This
minimizes the stock in your company’s warehouse as well as capital outlay. n Your customers may also order replacement parts. n The components of the PC come from different vendors. Requirements are therefore transferred to
purchasing at the component level. This means that one order could generate several purchase orders.
n An availability check in the order is not necessary because the components are ordered directly from the distributor.
n The delivery note must contain details of both the PC and all of its components. n The invoice contains the whole package with the quantity that was delivered. All of the components
should be listed in the invoice.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG
R
Bills of Bills of Materials Materials - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 1
The bills of materials are saved in the
system as a master record.
Master recordMaster record
BOM BOM PC PC packagepackage
ComponentsComponentsBasic Basic equipequip. 1 . 1 Processor Processor 1 1 Memory Memory 44. . . . . .
MailMail
Order 5718
Cust.: 2738
100 PC package 1
1. Enter material number with BoM
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG
R
Bills ofBills of Materials Materials - Exploding BOMs in SalesOrder 2
The bills of materials are saved in the system as a master record.
Master recordMaster record
BOM BOM PC PC packagepackage
ComponentsComponentsBasicBasic equipequip. 1. 1ProcessorProcessor 11MemoryMemory 44. . . . . .
MailMail
Order 5718
Cust.: 2738
100 PC package 1
1. Enter material number with BOM
2. System determinesitem category of main
item
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG
R
Bills ofBills of Materials Materials - Exploding BOMs in SalesOrder 3
The bills of materials are saved in the system as a master record.
Master recordMaster record
BOM BOM PCPC packagepackage
ComponentsComponentsBasicBasic equipequip. 1. 1ProcessorProcessor 11MemoryMemory 44. . . . . .
MailMail
Order 5718
Cust.: 2738
110 Basic equip. 1 100 PC package 1
1. Enter material number with BOM
2. System determines item category of main
item
3. Item category explodesthe bill of material
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG
R
Bills ofBills of Materials Materials - Exploding BOMs in SalesOrder
The bills of materials are saved in the system as a master record.
Master recordMaster record
BOM BOM PCPC packagepackage
ComponentsComponentsBasicBasic equipequip. 1 . 1 ProcessorProcessor 1 1 MemoryMemory 44. . . . . .
MailMail
Order 5718
Cust.: 2738
110 Basic equip. 1 100 PC package 1
1. Enter material number with BOM
2. System determines item category of main
item
3. Item category explodes the bill of material
4. System determines theitem categories for the
sub-items
120 Processor 1 130 Memory 4 140 Monitor 1
The material and components in the BOM are controlled by
the item and schedule line categories.
n If there is a bill of material master record for the material, it can be exploded in the sales document. This depends on the settings you make in Customizing.
n The structure is exploded in the following order in the sales document: � .The material that has a bill of material is entered in the order. This is the main item of the bill of
material. � .The system determines the item category of the main item, which controls whether and how the
system should explode the BOM. � .If the BOM should be exploded, the system does it automatically. The components are then
listed in the document as sub-items for the main item. � .The system determines an item category for each sub-item.
n You can control the functions of each item category when you define it. Schedule line categories are determined for every item category and these can also be configured individually.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG
R
Bills of Bills of Materials Materials - Tasks
l Create bills of materials
l Modify sales document type
l Create your own item category groups
l Create and assign your own item categories
l Identify and assign suitable schedule line categories
l Generate automatic purchase requisition
l Test the bills of materials
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
Scenario: Bills of Material in Sales and Distribution
• Update document type controls
• Create item category groups
• Create bills of material for Sales and Distribution
• Create and assign item categories
• Create and assign schedule line categories
• Set up automatic purchase requisitions
• Test the process
Your company, IDES, is a trading company that specializes in selling personal computers that have been designed to meet your customer's requirements. You obtain the components from a distributor who is in contact with producers in the Far East. The components are not ordered from the distributor until the customer has placed an order for the PC. This reduces warehouse stock and therefore, capital outlay.
So that you can order the individual components of a PC from different distributors, requirements have to be transferred to the Purchasing department at the component level. This means that one sales order could lead to several purchase orders.
However, the invoice only contains the whole item with the quantity that was delivered.
Your customers are also able to purchase individual spare parts. This means that you must still be able to price the components individually.
The delivery note and the billing document should contain both the PC and all its relevant components. An availability check is not necessary for the order because you procure the components directly from the distributor.
You also want to determine the cost for all components for statistics and controlling purposes.
Change the settings for a bill of material (BOM) in Sales and Distribution so that it can fulfill all these requirements.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
1-1 BOMs Save a PC package in your system as a single-level bill of material by using the materials created for you in the training system.
1-1-1 Create a BOM for material T-ATS##: Material: T-ATS## Plant: 1200 Dresden BOM usage: 5 Sales and distribution Valid from: Today Enter the following BOM items with the BOM item category L (stock item): Item 10: T-ATT## 1 piece Item 20: T-ATU## 1 piece Item 30: T-ATV## 4 pieces Item 40: T-ATW## 1 piece
1-1-2 Check whether the items in the BOM are relevant to sales documents. How is this achieved? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
1-1-3 Which item category groups are assigned to the materials in the BOM for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10 in the material master? T-ATS##: _________________________________ T-ATT##: _________________________________ T-ATU##: _________________________________ T-ATV##: _________________________________ T-ATW##: _________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
1-2 Create an order Check your new sales and distribution BOM by creating an order in the test system.
1-2-1 Create an order for the BOM you have just created. Order type: ZA## Sales area: 1000 10 00 Customer: T-L63D## PO number: BOM## - 01 Material: T-ATS## (Quantity: 1 piece) Does the system explode the BOM? _________________________________
1-2-2 What item categories are automatically chosen by the system for the main and sub- items? Main item: _________________________________ Sub- items: _________________________________
1-2-3 At what level does pricing take place? _________________________________ Where is this controlled in Customizing? ______________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________
1-2-4 Which items will appear in the billing document and why? _________________________________________________ _________________________________________________
1-2-5 Which schedule line categories does the system find for the main and sub-items? Main item: _________________________________ Sub- item: _________________________________
1-3 Sales document type Although you are using Sales and Distribution BOMs in sales document type ZA##, the
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
rest of sales processing in your company is the same as that in the R/3 Standard System. Therefore, deliveries are created for delivery type LF and billing documents with billing document type F2.
1-3-1 Check whether the correct default values have been activated in your sales document type and if necessary, change any settings. Delivery type: _____________________________ Order-related billing document type: _____________________________ Delivery-related billing document type: _____________________________
1-3-2 The items in the sales document should be numbered in 100s. If you explode a BOM, the sub- items should be numbered in 10s. Configure your sales document type accordingly. Item no. increment: _________________________________ Sub-item increment: _________________________________
1-4 Item category in the sales order You are using the settings already defined in Customizing for the SAP R/3 Standard System for your BOM settings. Therefore, copy the item categories from the standard system. You want the following to take place in your BOMs: – Pricing should be calculated for the whole package. – The delivery note should contain all the items in the package. – The invoice should contain the main item and its components with the quantities that were actually delivered. – The whole BOM should be exploded in the sales document.
1-4-1 The settings that you configure in the main item are valid for the whole package. Create a new item category ZH## with description Package##-MI by copying item category TAQ. Name: ZH## Description: Package##-MI
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
1-4-2 If necessary, change the item category ZH## to meet your needs. Note the Pricing, Relev. for billing, Sched. line allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields. Pricing: _________________________________ Relev. for billing: _________________________________ Sched. line allowed: _________________________________ Determine cost: _________________________________ Structure scope: _________________________________ Application: _________________________________
1-4-3 The settings at the sub-item level control all of the tasks that you want to implement separately for each item. Create a new item category ZU## with description Package##-SI by copying item category TAE. Name: ZU## Description: Package##-SI
1-4-4 If necessary, change item category ZU## so that it meets your requirements. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields. Pricing: _________________________________ Relev. for billing: _________________________________ Sched. line allowed: _________________________________ Determine cost: _________________________________ Structure scope: _________________________________ Application: _________________________________
1-4-5 If you want to sell the computer parts separately, there should be a separate item category in the sales document. Create a new item category ZN## with description PC parts## by copying TAN. Name: ZN## Description: PC parts##
1-4-6 If necessary, change item category ZN## to meet your requirements. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields. Pricing: _________________________________ Relev. for billing: _________________________________ Sched. line allowed: _________________________________ Determine cost: _________________________________ Structure scope: _________________________________ Application: _________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
1-5 Define item category group To be able to use the controls that have been defined for BOMs in the standard system, you decide to create a third, independent control.
1-5-1 Define the new item category group Z0## with description MTPOS Group##.
1-5-2 Change the item category group of your BOM product T-ATS## to Z0##.
1-6 Assign item categories The new item categories should be used in the sales document type ZA##.
1-6-1 Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZH## Package##-MI for the main item of the BOM.
1-6-2 Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZU## Package##-SI for the sub- items in the BOM.
1-6-3 Configure the settings so that when you sell individual computer parts, the system finds the new item category ZN## PC parts## and no other alternatives are possible.
1-7 Schedule line category The components should be automatically ordered from the distributor when the sales order has been saved. Two schedule line categories have been created in the training system for your group.
1-7-1 Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that a delivery item is created from the schedule line? _______________________________________________________________
1-7-2 Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that goods issue is posted to inventory management? _______________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
1-7-3 Schedule line category ZH with description HP-606 has been created to control the main item. Check the following fields in Customizing: Item rel.f.dlv: _________________________________ Movement type: _________________________________ Transfer of requirements: _________________________________ Availability check: _________________________________
1-7-4 Schedule line ZU purchase order has been created to control the lower-level items. Check the following fields in Customizing: Item rel. f. dlv: _________________________________ Movement type: _________________________________ Transfer of requirements: _________________________________ Availability check: _________________________________
1-7-5 If an order is placed for a PC, you want purchase requisition creation to take place automatically for the components. All the necessary information is contained in the schedule lines in the sales order. Important control parameters were already determined for purchase requisition creation when you defined the schedule line category in the sales order. Check the following entries in the schedule line category for the sub-items in the BOM: Purchase order type:_________________________________ P.req.del.sched: _________________________________ Item category: ____________________________ (purchase requisition) Acct. assigt cat.: _________________________________
1-8 Assign schedule line category
1-8-1 Which MRP type was assigned to each material in the BOM for plant 1200 in the material master record? T-ATS##: _________________________________ T-ATT##: _________________________________ T-ATU##: _________________________________ T-ATV##: _________________________________ T-ATW##: _________________________________
1-8-2 Configure your settings so that the system finds schedule line category ZH HP-606 for the main item in the BOM.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
1-8-3 Configure your settings so that the system finds schedule line category ZU purchase order for the sub- items in the BOM.
1-8-4 Configure the settings so that the system finds the schedule line category ZU purchase order for items in category ZN##.
1-9 Item category in the delivery Because the PC to be delivered to the customer consists of individual components, which have all been ordered, you decide that the system should pick the goods at component level.
1-9-1 Ensure that the components in the BOM have to be picked by configuring delivery item category ZU## so that it is the same as delivery item category TAN.
1-9-2 Ensure that the main item in the BOM is not picked.
1-9-3 How does delivery item category ZN## respond with regard to picking? Check and if necessary, change the settings.
1-10 Create an order Test your BOM in a sales order.
1-10-1 Create an order. Document type: ZA## Sales area: 1000 10 00 Customer: T-L63D## PO number: BOM## - 02 Requested dlv. date: in two weeks Material: T-ATS## (Quantity: 1 piece) Does the system explode the BOM? _________________________________
1-10-2 Which item numbers does the system give the BOM? 1st item: _________________________________ 2nd item: _________________________________ 3rd item: _________________________________ 4th item: _________________________________ 5th item: _________________________________
1-10-3 Does the system automatically use your item categories for the main and sub-items?
(C) SAP AG SCM605 17
Main item: _________________________________ Sub-items: _________________________________
1-10-4 Does the system automatically use your schedule line categories? Schedule line category for main item: ____________________________ Schedule line category for sub-item: ____________________________
1-10-5 Check whether the system automatically generates a purchase requisition when you save the document. _________________________________
1-10-6 Check whether the settings in schedule line category ZU are automatically transferred to the purchase requisition. Document type: _________________________________ Item category: _________________________________ Account assignment category: _________________________________
1-10-7 Your customer adds two more monitors to the orginal order. Change the order and enter an item with material T-ATW##. What is the item number of this item? Number: _________________________________
1-10-8 Which item and schedule line categories does the system use for the new item? Item category: _________________________________ Schedule line category: _________________________________
1-10-9 Did the system calculate a price for this material and if so, why? ___________________________________________________
1-10-10 You can call up the purchase requisition directly from the sales document and edit it there. Branch to the purchase requisition from the order.
1-10-11 Deliver the order. Does the system explode the BOM in the delivery note? _________________________________ Pick the delivery by creating a transfer order (warehouse number: 012). Post goods issue.
1-10-12 Bill the delivery. Does the system explode the BOM in the billing document? _________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 18
Do the prices appear in the billing document? _________________________________ Main item: _________________________________ Sub-item: _________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 19
Scenario: Bills of Material in Sales and Distribution
• Update document type controls
• Create item category groups
• Create bills of material for Sales and Distribution
• Create and assign item categories
• Create and assign schedule line categories
• Set up automatic purchase requisitions
• Test the process
Your company, IDES, is a trading company that specializes in selling personal computers that have been designed to meet your customer's requirements. You obtain the components from a distributor who is in contact with producers in the Far East. The components are not ordered from the distributor until the customer has placed an order for the PC. This reduces warehouse stock and therefore, capital outlay.
So that you can order the individual components of a PC from different distributors, requirements have to be transferred to the Purchasing department at the component level. This means that one sales order could lead to several purchase orders.
However, the invoice only contains the whole item with the quantity that was delivered.
Your customers are also able to purchase individual spare parts. This means that you must still be able to price the components individually.
The delivery note and the billing document should contain both the PC and all its relevant components. An availability check is not necessary for the order because you procure the components directly from the distributor.
You also want to determine the cost for all components for statistics and controlling purposes.
Change the settings for a bill of material (BOM) in Sales and Distribution so that it can fulfill all these requirements.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 20
1-1 BOMs Save a PC package in your system as a single-level bill of material by using the materials created for you in the training system.
1-1-1 Create a BOM for material T-ATS##: Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Bills of material → Bill of material → Material BOM → Create Material: T-ATS## Plant: 1200 Dresden BOM usage: 5 Sales and distribution Valid from: Today Enter the following BOM items with the BOM item category L (stock item): Item 10: T-ATT## 1 piece Item 20: T-ATU## 1 piece Item 30: T-ATV## 4 pieces Item 40: T-ATW## 1 piece
1-1-2 Check whether the items in the BOM are relevant to sales documents. Bill of material → Material BOM → Change → Select items → Goto → Item → Status/long text How is this achieved? The item has been given the status "relevant to sales". When you create a BOM, this status is automatically activated because the BOM has been created as a Sales and Distribution BOM. (Usage indicator: 5 Sales and distribution).
1-1-3 Which item category groups are assigned to the materials in the BOM for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10 in the material master? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Material → Trading goods → Display → Choose "Sales: Sales Org. Data 2" view T-ATS##: ERLA T-ATT##: NORM T-ATU##: NORM T-ATV##: NORM T-ATW##: NORM
(C) SAP AG SCM605 21
1-2 Create an order Check your new sales and distribution BOM by creating an order in the test system.
1-2-1 Create an order for the BOM you have just created. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create Order type: ZA## Sales area: 1000 10 00 Customer: T-L63D## PO number: BOM## - 01 Material: T-ATS## (Quantity: 1 piece) Does the system explode the BOM? Yes
1-2-2 What item categories are automatically chosen by the system for the main and sub- items? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create → Choose "Sales" tab page Main item: TAQ Sub- items: TAE
1-2-3 At what level does pricing take place? → Select item → Choose "Pricing" Pricing occurs at the main item, not at the sub-item level. Where is this controlled in Customizing? IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories → Select TAQ/TAE → Choose "Details" – TAQ is relevant to pricing – TAE is not relevant to pricing
(C) SAP AG SCM605 22
1-2-4 Which items will appear in the billing document and why? IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories → Select TAQ/TAE → Choose "Details" Only the main item. Only item category TAQ is relevant to billing.
1-2-5 Which schedule line categories does the system find for the main and sub-items? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change → Select item → Choose "Sched. lines" Main item: CN Sub- item: CT
1-3 Sales document type Although you are using Sales and Distribution BOMs in sales document type ZA##, the rest of sales processing in your company is the same as that in the R/3 Standard System. Therefore, deliveries are created for delivery type LF and billing documents with billing document type F2.
1-3-1 Check whether the correct default values have been activated in your sales document type and if necessary, change any settings. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header → Define sales document types → Select ZA## → Choose "Details" Delivery type: LF Order-related billing document type: F2 Delivery-related billing document type: F2
1-3-2 The items in the sales document should be numbered in 100s. If you explode a BOM, the sub- items should be numbered in 10s. Configure your sales document type accordingly. Item no. increment: 100 Sub-item increment: 10
(C) SAP AG SCM605 23
1-4 Item category in the sales order You are using the settings already defined in Customizing for the SAP R/3 Standard System for your BOM settings. Therefore, copy the item categories from the standard system. You want the following to take place in your BOMs: – Pricing should be calculated for the whole package. – The delivery note should contain all the items in the package. – The invoice should contain the main item and its components with the quantities that were actually delivered. – The whole BOM should be exploded in the sales document.
1-4-1 The settings that you configure in the main item are valid for the whole package. Create a new item category ZH## with description Package##-MI by copying item category TAQ. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories → Select TAQ → Choose "Copy" Name: ZH## Description: Package##-MI
1-4-2 If necessary, change the item category ZH## to meet your needs. Note the Pricing, Relev. for billing, Sched. line allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields. Pricing: X Standard pricing Relev. for billing: A Relevant for delivery-related billing Sched. line allowed: activated Determine cost: activated Structure scope: A Explode single-level bill of material Application: SD01 Sales and Distribution
1-4-3 The settings at the sub-item level control all of the tasks that you want to implement separately for each item. Create a new item category ZU## with description Package##-SI by copying item category TAE. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories → Select TAE → Choose "Copy" Name: ZU## Description: Package##-SI
1-4-4 If necessary, change item category ZU## so that it meets your requirements. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope,
(C) SAP AG SCM605 24
Application and Determine cost fields. Pricing: Empty (no pricing) Relev. for billing: A relevant for delivery-related billing Sched. line allowed: Activated Determine cost: Activated Structure scope: Empty (do not explode material structure) Application: Empty
1-4-5 If you want to sell the computer parts separately, there should be a separate item category in the sales document. Create a new item category ZN## with description PC parts## by copying TAN. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories → Select TAN → Choose "Copy" Name: ZN## Description: PC parts##
1-4-6 If necessary, change item category ZN## to meet your requirements. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields. Pricing: X Standard pricing Relev. for billing: A Relevant for delivery-related billing Sched. line allowed: Activated Determine cost: Activated Structure scope: Empty (do not explode bill of material structure) Application: Empty
1-5 Define item category group To be able to use the controls that have been defined for BOMs in the standard system, you decide to create a third, independent control.
1-5-1 Define the new item category group Z0## with description MTPOS Group##. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item category group → Choose "New entries" Item category group: Z0## Description: MTPOS Group##
(C) SAP AG SCM605 25
1-5-2 Change the item category group of your BOM product T-ATS## to Z0##. → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Materials → Trading goods → Change → Choose "Sales: Sales Org. Data 2" view Sales Org: 1000 Distribution channel: 10 Item category group: Z0##
1-6 Assign item categories The new item categories should be used in the sales document type ZA##.
1-6-2 Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZH## Package##-MI for the main item of the BOM. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories → Choose "New entries" Sales doc. type: ZA## Item cat. group: Z0## Item usage: empty ItemCat-HghLvItem: empty Item category: ZH##
1-6-2 Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZU## Package##-SI for the sub- items in the BOM. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories → Choose "New entries" Sales doc. type: ZA## Item cat. group: NORM Item usage: empty ItemCat-HghLvItem: ZH## Item category: ZU##
1-6-3 Configure the settings so that when you sell individual computer parts, the system finds the new item category ZN## PC parts## and no other alternatives are possible. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories → Choose "Position" Sales doc. type: ZA## Item category group: NORM
(C) SAP AG SCM605 26
Item category: empty ItemCat-HghLvItem: empty Item category: ZN## (overwrite TAN) → Choose "Details"→ Delete all alternative item categories
1-7 Schedule line category The components should be automatically ordered from the distributor when the sales order has been saved. Two schedule line categories have been created in the training system for your group. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Define schedule line categories → Select any schedule line category → Choose "Details"
1-7-1 Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that a delivery item is created from the schedule line? The "Item relevant for delivery" indicator has to be activated.
1-7-2 Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that goods issue is posted to inventory management? The movement type
1-7-3 Schedule line category ZH with description HP-606 has been created to control the main item. Check the following fields in Customizing: Item rel.f.dlv: activated Movement type: empty Transfer of requirements: empty Availability check: empty
1-7-4 Schedule line ZU purchase order has been created to control the lower-level items. Check the following fields in Customizing: Item rel. f. dlv: activated Movement type: 601 Transfer of requirements: empty Availability check: empty
1-7-5 If an order is placed for a PC, you want purchase requisition creation to take place automatically for the components. All the necessary information is contained in the schedule lines in the sales order. Important control parameters were already determined for purchase requisition creation when you defined the schedule line category in the sales
(C) SAP AG SCM605 27
order. Check the following entries in the schedule line category for the sub-items in the BOM: Purchase order type:NB P.req.del.sched: activated Item category: 0 Normal (purchase requisition) Acct. assigt cat.: E Customer individual requirements
1-8 Assign schedule line category
1-8-1 Which MRP type was assigned to each material in the BOM for plant 1200 in the material master record? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Materials → Trading goods → Display → View: MRP 1 T-ATS##: ND T-ATT##: PD T-ATU##: PD T-ATV##: PD T-ATW##: PD
1-8-2 Configure your settings so that the system finds schedule line category ZH HP-606 for the main item in the BOM. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Assign schedule lines → Choose "Position" Item category: ZH## MRP type: ND SchedLineCat: Change to ZH
1-8-3 Configure your settings so that the system finds schedule line category ZU purchase order for the sub- items in the BOM. Item category: ZU## MRP type: PD SchedLineCat: Change to ZU
1-8-4 Configure the settings so that the system finds the schedule line category ZU purchase order for items in category ZN##. Item category: ZN## MRP type: PD SchedLineCat: Change to ZU
(C) SAP AG SCM605 28
1-9 Item category in the delivery Because the PC to be delivered to the customer consists of individual components, which have all been ordered, you decide that the system should pick the goods at component level. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Shipping → Deliveries → Define item categories for deliveries
1-9-1 Ensure that the components in the BOM have to be picked by configuring delivery item category ZU## so that it is the same as delivery item category TAN. → Mat. no. 0 allowed: Activate → Check quantity 0: A Note about the situation → Check minimum quantity: A Note about the situation → Relevant for picking: Activate → StLocation required: Activate → Determine StLocation: Activate → AutoBatchDeterm.: Activate
1-9-2 Ensure that the main item in the BOM is not picked. → Relevant for picking: Deactivate
1-9-3 How does delivery item category ZN## respond with regard to picking? Check and if necessary, change the settings. If you sell spare parts, they don't need to be picked either. As item category ZN## was created by copying TAN, you do not need to change the settings for picking for this delivery item category.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 29
1-10 Create an order Test your BOM in a sales order.
1-10-1 Create an order. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create Document type: ZA## Sales area: 1000 10 00 Customer: T-L63D## PO number: BOM## - 02 Requested dlv. date: in two weeks Material: T-ATS## (Quantity: 1 piece) Does the system explode the BOM? Yes
1-10-2 Which item numbers does the system give the BOM? 1st item: 100 2nd item: 110 3rd item: 120 4th item: 130 5th item: 140
1-10-3 Does the system automatically use your item categories for the main and sub-items? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change → Choose "Sales" tab page Main item: ZH## Sub-items: ZU##
1-10-4 Does the system automatically use your schedule line categories? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change Select item → Choose "Sched. lines" Schedule line category for main item: ZH Schedule line category for sub-item: ZU
1-10-5 Check whether the system automatically generates a purchase requisition when you save the document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 30
Logistics → Materials management → Purchasing → Requisition → Display Yes
1-10-6 Check whether the settings in schedule line category ZU are automatically transferred to the purchase requisition. Document type: NB Item category: empty (corresponds to entry 0 in schedule line category) Account assignment category: E
1-10-7 Your customer adds two more monitors to the orginal order. Change the order an enter an item with material T-ATW##. What is the item number of this item? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change Material: T-ATW## (2 pieces) Number: 200
1-10-8 Which item and schedule line categories does the system use for the new item? Item category: ZN## PC parts ## → Choose "Procurement" tab page Schedule line category: ZU purchase order
1-10-9 Did the system calculate a price for this material and if so, why? → Select item → Choose "Pricing" Yes. Item category ZN## is priced by the system.
1-10-10 You can call up the purchase requisition directly from the sales document and edit it there. Branch to the purchase requisition from the order. Select item → Choose "Sched. lines" Select schedule line → Choose "Details"→ Choose "Procurement" tab page Choose "Edit"
1-10-11 Deliver the order. Does the system explode the BOM in the delivery note? Yes
(C) SAP AG SCM605 31
Pick the delivery by creating a transfer order (warehouse number: 012). Post goods issue. → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Shipping → Delivery → Create → Delivery → Save and subseq. functions → Transfer order Whse number: 012 Foreground/background: H Adopt picked quantity: 2
1-10-12 Bill the delivery. Does the system explode the BOM in the billing document? → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document → Create → Choose "Execute" Yes Do the prices appear in the billing document? → Select item → Choose "Pricing" Main item: No Sub-item: Yes
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG
R
Material Determination
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG
R
Material Determination Material Determination - Business Background
Materials can be automatically replaced in sales documents.
In the following scenario, it is your job to set up automatic substitution for your company, IDES.
The stock for the old material should be used up for the orders, before you sell the new product. However, you also want to deliver the new product to certain customers.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG
R
Material Material Determination Determination - Order
.
Material determination contains a valid
material master record.
Order
Cust.: 2738
1000 10 00
10 old PC 1 pc
Order no.: 5907
You create an order for the old material.
Master RecordMaster Record
CustomerCustomer: : 27382738
Subst:Subst: new new PCPC
EnteredEntered.:.: old old PCPC
Order
Cust.: 2738
1000 10 00
10 new PC 1 pc
Order no.: 5907
The system automatically enters the new material in
the order.
n You want to use material determination to meet the following requirements: � Special customers always receive the newest model even if a purchase order is created for the old
one by mistake. A warning message should inform the employee who creates the order that the material will be automatically replaced.
� This should also take place if the customer is also the ship-to party in the sales document. � All other customers only receive the new material if they order it specifically. � Once the stock of the old material has been used up, the new material can then automatically
replace the old one in the sales document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
Material Determination - Condition Technique (6)
Sales doc. type OR
. . .
Procedure A00001
Condition type A001
Access sequence A002
Access:10 2 SlsOrg/DistCh/Ent.mat.
Access:20 1 Material entered
10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .
Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 01/01/2002
Table 2 ð No record available
Table 1 ð Successful access
Entry: MAT-10
Material determination master record
Valid from . . . To . . .Subst.reason: 0002
Substitution material: M-10
Order
Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1
Material : M-10. . .
n The condition technique provides more flexibility in modeling material determination and product selection.
n You can assign a material determination procedure to each sales document type. The procedure contains all of the Customizing information that the system needs for material determination. The procedure includes one or more defined condition types
n One access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type. n Each access sequence consists of one or more accesses. n Each access contains exactly one condition table. This represents the search key that the system uses
to search for a valid master record. n You can activate an analysis of the material determination in the sales document. The system then
displays detailed information on how the materials were determined.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG
R
Material DeterminationMaterial Determination - Customizing
Assigned to sales document type
Material determination procedure
Condition type
Access sequence
Access
Condition table
Star
tSt
art
Material determination master record
!AnalyseAnalyseAnalyse
n You should configure Customizing in the reverse sequence as the system searches for the valid material determination master records for sales orders.
n You can activate the material determination analysis in the sales document. Menu path: Environment ----> Analysis --> Material determination --> On You can use this function to check Customizing in detail and carry out a step-by-step search of the system. This helps you to recognize and correct any incorrect settings quickly and easily.
n Note: The analysis runs during material determination so it must be activated before you enter the items in the document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG
R
Material Determination Material Determination - Substitution Reason
Should the material be re-
determined when you create the
delivery?
Order
Cust: 2738
1000 10 00
10 new PC 1 pc
Order no.: 5907
Delivery
Cust: 2738
1000 10 00
10 new PC 1pc
Order no.: 5907
?Orderconfirmation
Old PC 1 pc
Which material appears in the
order confirmation?
n If the system automatically replaces the old material because it is no longer available (= automatic product selection), you can re-execute substitution when you create a delivery. This is useful if the amount of available material changes between creating the order and the delivery.
n Depending on your settings in Customizing, the order confirmation can contain either the material that was ordered or the substitution material.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG
R
Material Determination Material Determination - Tasks
l Create a new material master record
l Create a new condition table
l Set up a new access sequence
l Set up a new condition type for material determination
l Set up a new procedure for material determination
l Create a new reason for substitution
l Create master records for material determination
l Test the effect of material determination in the order, delivery and order confirmation
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
Scenario: Material Determination
• Build and execute condition technique in material determination
• Define and assign material determination procedure
• Define material determination type
• Define access sequences
• Define condition tables
• Define a reason for substitution
• Create master records
• Test process
Your company IDES sells computers and computer parts. Recently you have added new products to your stock.
It is your job to configure the sales and distribution model so that special customers always receive a new product when they order the old one. All other customers should continue to receive the old product until stocks run out.
Up until now, you have been using material determination with the standard Customizing settings that were delivered in your R/3 System. In this exercise, you will change material determination to meet your new requirements.
1-1 Material master record: Your monitor T-ATQ## is one of the most successful trading goods in the engineering industry and therefore, your company is constantly updating it.
1-1-1 Create a material master record for the new product T-ATR##. Use the previous model T-ATQ## as a reference. Maintain the following views: – Basic data 1 and 2 – MRP 1-4 – Sales:Sales org. Data 1 and 2 – Forecasting – Sales: General/Plant data – Storage 1 and 2 – Sales Text – Accounting 1 and 2 Create the material in the following organizational units:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
Plant: 1200 Sales organization: 1000 Storage location: 0001 Distribution channel: 10 Use the same organization units for your copy. Copy the data from the previous model and add or change the following fields: – Basic data 1: Material description: NewScreen ## Old material number: ##LO606-06 Net weight: 15 kg Gross weight: 16 kg – Sales 2: Pricing ref. material: M-15 – MRP 2: Issue stor. location: 0001 – Accounting 1: Standard price: 1600
1-1-2 Post 1000 pieces to the unrestricted-use stock (movement type: 561, plant: 1200, storage location: 0001).
1-2 Condition table In the condition table, you define the fields in the sales document whose data the system should use to find a valid master record for material determination.
1-2-1 Create the new condition table 6## so that you can use it for creating master records for material determination. The new condition table should allow you to create master records that are only effective for certain customers and materials. You want to be able to restrict the validity of the master records. Use condition table 002 as a reference. Condition table: 6## Reference condition table: 002 Description: Customer / Material ## Note: Make sure that the material you want to enter appears as the last key field in the condition table. This means that the system checks the header fields first (for example, customer) and then the item fields in the condition table, which improves system performance.
1-2-2 When you set up the condition table, you can determine what the screen for processing master records in the new condition table looks like. For efficient maintenance of master records, you should be able to process the
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
customer and material numbers in separate lines.
1-2-3 Generate the new condition table. Note: Create the new object in the Data Dictionary for development class $TMP. It is then a local object and cannot be transported.
1-2-4 What information do you receive in the log?
1-3 Access sequence The access sequence is the strategy used by the system to search for valid master records for a particular condition type. The access sequence contains one or more search steps (= accesses). Each access contains a condition table which determines the key fields for the search. These are the document fields that the system uses to search for valid master records. Define a new access sequence containing three steps that the system can use to search for master records in material determination: 1. Was a master record stored for the material and the sold-to party? 2. Was a master record stored for the material and the ship-to party? 3. Was a master record stored for the material that substitutes the material depending on availability?
1-3-1 Define the new access sequence. AcSq (access sequence): Z0## Description: Search strategy ##
1-3-2 The material should be substituted in the first access if there is a valid master record for the customer and the entered material.
1-3-3 Branch to the fields in the condition table entered and look at the settings. Which field in the sales document does the system use to determine the customer number? _________________________________
1-3-4 Substitution should take place in the second access if there is a valid master record for the ship-to party and entered material.
1-3-5 In the third step, the system should only search for valid master records in material determination using the material entered. This is the standard setting in the R/3 System. Check the fields in the access.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
1-3-6 Save the new access sequence and create your own change request. Short description: Access sequence group ##
1-4 Condition type for material determination You can represent material determination with different search strategies. You have to create an individual condition type for each search strategy that you use in the business process.
1-4-1 Create a new condition type with the access sequence that you have just defined. CType (condition type): Z0## Name: Condition type ## Access sequence: Z0##
1-4-2 Customize the condition type so that when you create a master record, the system automatically proposes a validity period from today to the end of the year.
1-5 Material determination procedure All the tasks that are undertaken in the business process for material determination are anchored in a procedure for material determination. The material determination procedure contains one or more condition types and each condition type can refer to its own access sequence. Define a new procedure. Proc. (material determination procedure): Z000## Description: Group procedure ##
1-5-1 Copy the condition type you defined earlier into the procedure. Step: 10 Cntr (counter): leave blank Condition type: Z0##
1-5-2 Assign the new determination procedure to sales document type ZA##.
1-6 Create reason for substitution Create a reason for substitution (Z## Substitution ##) for material determination, with the following characteristics:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
– The order confirmation should contain the material ordered by the customer. – The system should issue a warning message before it substitutes a material. – Substitution should take place automatically (i.e. without a selection screen). – The system should not generate any lower- level items in the document when it substitutes a material.
1-7 Create master records Create a master record for material determination.
1-7-1 T-L63B## is one of your special customers. Ensure that this customer always receives the new material in future orders, even if the sales order department enters an order for the old material by mistake. Use your substitution reason.
1-7-2 Ensure that this customer also always receives the new material in future orders when he or she is entered as the ship-to party in a sales process and an order is created with the old material. Use your substitution reason.
1-7-3 Enter another master record in which you ensure that material T-ATR## automatically replaces material T-ATQ## once the latter is no longer available. This should take place for all orders for material T-ATQ## regardless of the ordering party. The material should only be substituted in the sales document. The subsequent delivery document should copy the details from the sales order. Choose a relevant substitution reason. Note: The master record must contain the materials to be substituted, T-ATQ## and T-ATR##, in the correct sequence.
1-8 Create output Create a master record for output type BA00 Order confirmation for document type ZA##. Output type: BA00 Sales document type: ZA## Copy the default values from the output type by choosing Enter. Maintain printer LP01 as the output device and set the number of messages to 1.
1-9 Create an order Test your settings for material determination in the sales document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
1-9-1 According to the master record you have created for material determination, customer T-L63B## should always receive the new product T-ATR##. Create a standard order for customer T-L63B## and the old product T-ATQ## (10 pieces) (purchaser order number: MatDeter##01). Did the system substitute the material? _________________________________ Why? _________________________________
1-9-2 Create the same order for sales document type ZA## (purchase order number: MatDeter##02). Did the system substitute the material? _________________________________ Check the substitution reason in the sales document. Substitution reason: Z## Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which material is displayed in the printout? Material: _________________________________ Why? _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
1-9-3 T-L63B## is also the ship-to party for your customer T-L63C##. Create an order for ship-to party T-L63B##. Ship-to party: T-L63B## Sold-to party: T-L63C## Purchase order no: MatDeter##03 Activate the material determination analysis (before entering the item). _______________________________________________________________ Material: T-ATQ## (10 pieces) Did the system substitute the material for the ship-to party? _______________________________________________________________ Did the system display a warning message for the substitution? _______________________________________________________________ Use the analysis to check your Customizing settings for material determination. _______________________________________________________________ Use the analysis to check which date the system uses in the document to check the validity date of the master record? _______________________________________________________________
1-9-4 Enter another order for sales document type ZA## for a normal customer. Customer: T-L63A## PO number: MatDeter##04 Material: T-ATQ## (10 pieces) Check the substitution reason in the sales document. Substitution reason: ______________________________________________ Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which materials are displayed in the printout? Material: ____________________________________________________ Material: ____________________________________________________ Why? _______________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
1-9-5 Check the available stock for material T-ATQ##. Stock: _________________________________ Change the last order and enter a new item with a quantity that exceeds the available quantity. Which materials and quantity does the system automatically use when substituting this material? Material: _________________________________ Material: _________________________________ Check the order confirmation on the screen. Does the system display both substituted materials? _________________________________
1-9-6 Post 50 pieces of material T-ATQ## to stock. (Plant: 1200; storage location: 0001; movement type: 561). Deliver the last order. Compare the quantities in the order and the delivery. Are there any differences? Why? ______________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
Scenario: Material Determination
• Build and execute condition technique in material determination
• Define and assign material determination procedure
• Define material determination type
• Define access sequences
• Define condition tables
• Define a reason for substitution
• Create master records
• Test process
Your company IDES sells computers and computer parts. Recently you have added new products to your stock.
It is your job to configure the sales and distribution model so that special customers always receive a new product when they order the old one. All other customers should continue to receive the old product until stocks run out.
Up until now, you have been using material determination with the standard Customizing settings that were delivered in your R/3 System. In this exercise, you will change material determination to meet your new requirements.
1-1 Material master record: Your monitor T-ATQ## is one of the most successful trading goods in the engineering industry and therefore, your company is constantly updating it.
1-1-1 Create a material master record for the new product T-ATR##. Use the previous model T-ATQ## as a reference. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Material → Trading goods → Create → Industry sector: M Maintain the following views:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 17
– Basic data 1 and 2 – MRP 1-4 – Sales:Sales org. Data 1 and 2 – Forecasting – Sales: General/Plant data – Storage 1 and 2 – Sales Text – Accounting 1 and 2 Create the material in the following organizational units: Plant: 1200 Sales organization: 1000 Storage location: 0001 Distribution channel: 10 Note: Make sure that you complete both the organizational levels and copy from fields with the information above. Use the same organization units for your copy. Copy the data from the previous model and add or change the following fields: – Basic data 1: Material description: NewScreen ## Old material number: ##LO606-06 Net weight: 15 kg Gross weight: 16 kg – Sales 2: Pricing ref. material: M-15 – MRP 2: Issue stor. location: 0001 – Accounting 1: Standard price: 1600
1-1-2 Post 1000 pieces to the unrestricted-use stock (movement type: 561, plant: 1200, storage location: 0001). Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management Goods movement → Goods receipt → Other Movement type: 561 Plant: 1200 Storage location: 0001
(C) SAP AG SCM605 18
1-2 Condition table In the condition table, you define the fields in the sales document whose data the system should use to find a valid master record for material determination. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Material Determination
1-2-1 Create the new condition table 6## so that you can use it for creating master records for material determination. The new condition table should allow you to create master records that are only effective for certain customers and materials. You want to be able to restrict the validity of the master records. Use condition table 002 as a reference. → Maintain prerequisites for material determination → Condition tables - Create material determination Condition table: 6## Reference condition table: 002 Description: Customer / Material ## → Double-click on the "Customer" field in the FieldCatlg column. Note: Make sure that the material you want to enter appears as the last key field in the condition table. This means that the system checks the header fields first (for example, customer) and then the item fields in the condition table, which improves system performance.
1-2-2 When you set up the condition table, you can determine what the screen for processing master records in the new condition table looks like. For efficient maintenance of master records, you should be able to process the customer and material numbers in separate lines. → Choose "Technical view" → Activate the "Line" button for the "Customer" key field.
1-2-3 Generate the new condition table. Note: Create the new object in the Data Dictionary for development class $TMP. It is then a local object and cannot be transported. → Choose "Generate" → Development class: $TMP → Choose "Local object"
1-2-4 What information do you receive in the log? The log indicates that the new table was activated and that the condition
(C) SAP AG SCM605 19
record screens are ready to be generated. The system does not generate the screens for entering condition records immediately but when you create a master record with the new key combination (= condition table) for the first time.
1-3 Access sequence The access sequence is the strategy used by the system to search for valid master records for a particular condition type. The access sequence contains one or more search steps (= accesses). Each access contains a condition table which determines the key fields for the search. These are the document fields that the system uses to search for valid master records. Define a new access sequence containing three steps that the system can use to search for master records in material determination: 1. Was a master record stored for the material and the sold-to party? 2. Was a master record stored for the material and the ship-to party? 3. Was a master record stored for the material that substitutes the material depending on availability?
1-3-1 Define the new access sequence. → Maintain prerequisites for material determination → Maintain access sequences → Choose "New entries" AcSq (access sequence): Z0## Description: Search strategy ##
1-3-2 The material should be substituted in the first access if there is a valid master record for the customer and the entered material. → Select access sequence Z0## → Choose "Accesses" → Choose "New entries" → AcNo field: 10 → Tab field: 6##
1-3-3 Branch to the fields in the condition table entered and look at the settings. → Select Access 10 → Choose "Fields" → SAVE at this point only Which field in the sales document does the system use to determine the customer number? The system checks the KUNNR field. In the order, this is the field with the
(C) SAP AG SCM605 20
sold-to party's customer number.
1-3-4 Substitution should take place in the second access if there is a valid master record for the ship-to party and entered material. → Choose "Accesses" → AcNo field: 20 → Tab field: 6## → Select Access 20 → Choose "Fields" → Select KUNNR field → Choose "Details" → Select ship-to party (KUNWE)
1-3-5 In the third step, the system should only search for valid master records in material determination using the material entered. This is the standard setting in the R/3 System. Check the fields in the access. → Choose "Accesses" → Choose "New entries" → AcNo field: 30 → Tab field: 001 → Select Access 30 → Choose "Fields"
1-3-6 Save the new access sequence and create your own change request. → Save → Choose "Create request" Short description: Access sequence group ## → Save → Assign request number to your change request by choosing "Enter".
1-4 Condition type for material determination You can represent material determination with different search strategies. You have to create an individual condition type for each search strategy that you use in the business process.
1-4-1 Create a new condition type with the access sequence that you have just defined. → Maintain prerequisites for material determination → Define type of material determination → Choose "New entries" CType (condition type): Z0## Name: Condition type ## Access sequence: Z0##
(C) SAP AG SCM605 21
1-4-2 Customize the condition type so that when you create a master record, the system automatically proposes a validity period from today to the end of the year. Valid from: leave blank Valid to: 2
1-5 Material determination procedure All the tasks that are undertaken in the business process for material determination are anchored in a procedure for material determination. The material determination procedure contains one or more condition types and each condition type can refer to its own access sequence. Define a new procedure. → Maintain prerequisites for material determination → Maintain procedure for material determination → Choose "New entries" Proc. (material determination procedure): Z000## Description: Group procedure ##
1-5-1 Copy the condition type you defined earlier into the procedure. → Select procedure Z000## → Choose "Control"→ New entries Step: 10 Cntr (counter): leave blank Condition type: Z0##
1-5-2 Assign the new determination procedure to sales document type ZA##. → Assign material determination to sales document types → Select entry ZA## → Enter procedure Z000##
(C) SAP AG SCM605 22
1-6 Create reason for substitution Create a reason for substitution (Z## Substitution ##) for material determination, with the following characteristics: → Define substitution reasons → Choose "New entries" Subst reason: Z## Description: Substitution ## – The order confirmation should contain the material ordered by the customer. – The system should issue a warning message before it substitutes a material. – Substitution should take place automatically (i.e. without a selection screen). – The system should not generate any lower- level items in the document when it substitutes a material. Entry field: activate Warning field: activate Strategy field: leave blank Outcome field: leave blank
1-7 Create master records Create a master record for material determination. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Material Determination → Create
1-7-1 T-L63B## is one of your special customers. Ensure that this customer always receives the new material in future orders, even if the sales order department enters an order for the old material by mistake. Use your substitution reason. Material determin. type:Z0## → Choose "Key combination"→ Select "Customer/Material ##" Customer: T-L63B## Material: T-ATQ## Material: T-ATR## Reason: Z##
1-7-2 Ensure that this customer also always receives the new material in future orders when he or she is entered as the ship-to party in a sales process and an order is created with the old material. Use your substitution reason. This has already been guaranteed by the first master record.
1-7-3 Enter another master record in which you ensure that material T-ATR## automatically replaces material T-ATQ## once the latter is no longer available.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 23
This should take place for all orders for material T-ATQ## regardless of the ordering party. The material should only be substituted in the sales document. The subsequent delivery document should copy the details from the sales order. Choose a relevant substitution reason. Note: The master record must contain the materials to be substituted, T-ATQ## and T-ATR##, in the correct sequence. Material determin. type:Z0## → Choose "Key combination"→ Select material entered MatEntered: T-ATQ## Material: T-ATQ## (at first T-ATQ## should be delivered) Reason: 0006 → Select entry → Choose "Alternative materials" Material: T-ATR## (is used once T-ATQ## is no longer available)
1-8 Create output Create a master record for output type BA00 Order confirmation for document type ZA##. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Output → Sales document → Create Output type: BA00 Sales document type: ZA## Copy the default values from the output type by choosing Enter. → Choose "Communication" Maintain printer LP01 as the output device and set the number of messages to 1.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 24
1-9 Create an order Test your settings for material determination in the sales document.
1-9-1 According to the master record you have created for material determination, customer T-L63B## should always receive the new product T-ATR##. Create a standard order for customer T-L63B## and the old product T-ATQ## (10 pieces) (purchaser order number: MatDeter##01). Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create Did the system substitute the material? No Why? The material determination procedure has been assigned to order type ZA## and not the standard order.
1-9-2 Create the same order for sales document type ZA## (purchase order number: MatDeter##02). Did the system substitute the material? Yes Check the substitution reason in the sales document. → Select item 10 → Choose "Details" → Choose "Sales A" tab page Substitution reason: Z## Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which material is displayed in the printout? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change → Sales document → Issue output to… → Screen → Select BA00 → Choose "Execute" → Choose "Execute" Material: T-ATQ## Why? The "Entered" key had been activated for substitution reason Z## which controls that the material entered in the order is printed out in the order confirmation.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 25
1-9-3 T-L63B## is also the ship-to party for your customer T-L63C##. Create an order for ship-to party T-L63B##. Ship-to party: T-L63B## Sold-to party: T-L63C## Purchase order no: MatDeter##03 Activate the material determination analysis (before entering the item). Environment → Analysis → Material determination → On Material: T-ATQ## (10 pieces) Did the system substitute the material for the ship-to party? Yes Did the system display a warning message for the substitution? Yes Use the analysis to check your Customizing settings for material determination. Select an entry in each list → Choose "Details" Use the analysis to check which date the system uses in the document to check the validity date of the master record? Requested delivery date
1-9-4 Enter another order for sales document type ZA## for a normal customer. Customer: T-L63A## PO number: MatDeter##04 Material: T-ATQ## (10 pieces) Check the substitution reason in the sales document. Substitution reason: 0006 Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which materials are displayed in the printout? Material: T-ATQ## Material: T-ATQ## Why? The order can be met using T-ATQ## so it is the only material delivered.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 26
1-9-5 Check the available stock for material T-ATQ##. → Select item → Environment → Availability Stock: _________________________________ Change the last order and enter a new item with a quantity that exceeds the available quantity. Which materials and quantity does the system automatically use when substituting this material? Material: T-ATQ## Material: T-ATR## Check the order confirmation on the screen. Does the system display both substituted materials? Yes
1-9-6 Post 50 pieces of material T-ATQ## to stock. (Plant: 1200; storage location: 0001; movement type: 561). Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management Goods movement → Goods receipt → Other Movement type: 561 Plant: 1200 Storage location: 0001 → Choose "Enter" → Material: T-ATQ## (quantity 50) Deliver the last order. → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Shipping → Delivery → Create Shipping point: 1200 Selection date: Today's date + 1 week Compare the quantities in the order and the delivery. Are there any differences? Why? No because of substitution reason 0006: The system only substitutes the material in the order and not in the delivery.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 1
SAP AG 1999
Appendix
l This unit contains extra materials to be used for reference purposes
l This material is not part of the standard course
l As a result, the material might not be used during the course
(C) SAP AG SCM605 2
SAP AG 1999
Appendix: Contents
l Table structures
l Matchcode objects
l Authorization objects
l Delivery block
l Special features of contracts
l Group master contracts
l Menu paths
l IDES data
(C) SAP AG SCM605 3
SAP AG 1999
Table Structure for Customers - SD View
KNVK KNVA KNVS
KNVP KNVD KNVL
KNA1
KNVV KNVI
n These tables contain the following information: KNA1: Customer master, general information KNVK: Contact persons KNVV: Customer master, sales area KNVA: Unloading points KNVI: Tax indicators KNVP: Partner functions KNVD: Documents KNVL: Licenses KNVS: Shipping data
n Logical database for customer master: DD F: Customer database
(C) SAP AG SCM605 4
SAP AG 1999
KNVH
Table Structure for Customer Hierarchies
n This table contains customer hierarchies. You create customer hierarchy nodes as customer master data.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 5
SAP AG 1999
Table Structure for Materials
MCHB
MCHA MLGT
MAPRMVERMBEW MLGNMARC
MAKT MARM MVKE MLAN MAEX
MARA
MCH1
MARD
n These tables contain the following information: MARA: General material data MAKT: Short texts MARM: Conversion factors MVKE: Sales data (for each sales organization and distribution channel) MLAN: Sales data (for each country) MAEX: Export licenses MARC: Plant data MBEW: Valuation data MLGN: Warehouse management inventory data MLGT: Warehouse management inventory type data MVER: Consumption data MAPR: Pointers for forecast data MARD: Storage location data MCH1: Cross-plant batches MCHA: Batches MCHB: Batch stocks
n Logical database for material master: CKM: Material master MSM: Material master
(C) SAP AG SCM605 6
SAP AG 1999
Table Structure for Customer - Material Information
KNMT
KNMTK
n These tables contain the following information: KNMTK: Header table
for increased performance KNMT: Data table
(C) SAP AG SCM605 7
SAP AG 1999
Table Structure for Bills of Material
STZUSTKO
STAS
STPO
STPU
MAST TPSTEQST STSTKDST DOST
n These tables contain the following information: MAST Material assignment to BOM EQST Equipment assignment to BOM KDST Sales order assignment to BOM DOST Document assignment to BOM STST Standard object assignment to BOM TPST Functional location assignment to BOM STKO BOM header data STZU Time-independent STL data STAS BOM item selection STPO BOM item data STPU BOM sub-item data
(C) SAP AG SCM605 8
SAP AG 1999
Table Structure for Sales Activities
VBFA
SADR STXL
VBUV VBPA NAST STXH
VBKA
VBUK
n These tables contain the following information: VBUK: Header status and administrative data VBKA Sales activity VBUV: Incompleteness log VBPA: SD document: Partner SADR: Address VBFA: SD document flows NAST: Output STXH: Texts: Header STXL: Texts: Lines
n Logical database: AK V: Sales documents
(C) SAP AG SCM605 9
SAP AG 1999
Sales Document Tables - Header
STXH/STXLTexts
VBUKHeader status
VEDAContract
VMVAMatchcodes
NASTOutput
PP-StatusJSTO
VBAKHeader
VBKDBusiness data
VEPAPartners
VAKPAPartner indexes
VBUVIncompleteness
VBFADocument flows
n These tables contain the following information: VBUK: Header status and administrative data VBAK: Sales document: Header data VBKD: Sales document: Business Data VAKPA: Partner index VEDA: Contract VBPA: Partner VBUV: Incompleteness log VBFA: SD document flows VMVA: Matchcodes STXH: Texts: Header STXL: Texts: Lines NAST: Output JSTO: PP status
(C) SAP AG SCM605 10
SAP AG 1999
Sales Document Tables - Item
VBKDBusiness data
VEDAContract
VBLBForecast dlv. sched.
VBEPSettings
VBUVIncompleteness
VBFADocument flows
VBPAPartners
JSTOPP status
VBBE/SRequirements
VBUPStatus
VEPVGShipping index
KONVConditions
VAPMAMaterial index
VMVAMatchcodes
STXH/STXLTexts
NASTOutput
CO object
Variants
Technical objects
Services
VBAPItem
n These tables contain the following information: VBUP: Item status VBAP: Sales document: Item data VBKD: Sales document: Business Data VEBA: Contract VBLB: Forecast delivery schedules VBEP: Sales document: Schedule line VBBE: Individual requirements VBBS: Summarized requirements VBUV: Incompleteness log VBFA: SD document flows VBPA: Partner JSTO: PP status NAST: Output STXH: Texts: Header STXL: Texts: Lines KONV: Conditions
(C) SAP AG SCM605 11
SAP AG 1999
Index Tables
VBKOF
VBKPA
VAKPA
VLKPA
VRKPA
VEPVG
VKDFS
VAPMA
VLPMA
VRPMA
VAKGU
VMVA
VMVL
VMCF
VMCR
VBSG
VBFA
VBKOF: SD index: Open sales activities for partner functions VBKPA: SD index: Sales activities for partner functions VAKPA: SD index: Sales orders for partner functions VLKPA: SD index: Deliveries - Partner functions VRKPA: SD index: Billing documents - Partner functions VAPMA: SD index: Order items - Material VLPMA: SD index: Delivery items - Material VRPMA: SD index: Billing items - Material VAKGU: SD index: Validity of inquiries and quotations VEPVG: Shipping due index: VKDFS: SD index: Billing trigger VBFA: SD document flows VMVA: Matchcode object: Sales documents VMVL: Matchcode object: Deliveries VMCF: Matchcode object: Billing documents VMCR: Matchcode object: Invoice lists VBSG: Matchcode object: SD document groups
(C) SAP AG SCM605 12
SAP AG 1999
Customer Matchcodes
Tables
General
Example
Table
Matchcode objectMatchcode object
Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs
Primary table: KNA1Secondary tables: KNVV
KNVPKNVK
Customer matchcodesDEBI
A Customers - generalS Customers by sales group
etc.
n All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. n Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode
object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. n Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields
are used for setting up a search term n Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot
be changed.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 13
SAP AG 1999
Contact Partners - Matchcodes
Tables
General
Example
Primary table: KNVKMatchcodes forcontact persons
VKNK
A Contact persons at customerN Contract persons by name
etc.
Table
Matchcode objectMatchcode object
Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs
n All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. n Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode
object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. n Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields
are used for setting up a search term n Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot
be changed. n Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 14
SAP AG 1999
Material Matchcodes
Example
Tables
General
Primary table: MARASecondary tables: MAKT
MVKEMARCetc.
Material matchcodesMAT1
M Search by descriptionS Sales material for descriptionK Search by classetc.
Table
Matchcode objectMatchcode object
Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs
n All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. n Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode
object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. n Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields
are used for setting up a search term n Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot
be changed. n Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 15
SAP AG 1999
Bill of Material Matchcodes
Tables
General
Example
Primary table: STZUBOM matchcodes
STZ1
E Equipment by BOM groupM Material by BOM group
etc.
Table
Matchcode objectMatchcode object
Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs
n All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. n Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode
object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. n Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields
are used for setting up a search term n Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot
be changed. n Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 16
SAP AG 1999
Sales Activity Matchcodes
Tables
General
Example
Primary table: VBUKSecondary tables: VBKA
Matchcode objectVMVK
A Sales activities by code
Table
Matchcode objectMatchcode object
Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs
n All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. n Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode
object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. n Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields
are used for setting up a search term n Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot
be changed. n Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 17
SAP AG 1999
Sales Order Matchcodes
Tables
General
Example
Matchcode object
Matchcode IDs
Primary table: VBUKSecondary tables: VBKA
Matchcode objectVMVK
A Sales docs by PO numberC Unconfirmed orders
Table
Matchcode objectMatchcode object
Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs
n All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. n Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode
object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. n Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields
are used for setting up a search term n Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot
be changed. n Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 18
SAP AG 1999
Authorization Objects - Customer Masters
Field groups
Sales area
Authorization group
Customer master
n The authorization group is a four-character, alphanumeric field that you maintain in the customer master.
n Maintain authorization objects for the customer master from the Sales view (sales area and authorization group) in the Sales and Distribution authorization class.
n You can combine as many fields from the customer master as required using field groups. You can define these groups in the 'Logistics general' chapter in the IMG. Maintain the authorization object itself, however, in the Accounting class. Here you will find additional authorization objects for the customer master from the Accounting view, for example company code authorization.
n For detailed information on authorization objects, see the node on authorization management in the Sales and Distribution section of the IMG.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 19
SAP AG 1999
Authorization Objects - Material Masters
Material master - Maintenance status
Control record/Period closing program
Company code
Warehouse no. Sales organization/Distribution channel
Plant
Material master
33
0010001 0002
n Maintain the authorization objects by going to Materials Management -> Master data. n For detailed instructions on authorization objects, see the Implementation Guide.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 20
SAP AG 1999
Authorization Objects - Bills of Materials
Authorization group
Bill of material category BOM usage
Plant
Bills of material
Collective changes Change withoutchange number
n The authorization group is a four-character, alphanumeric field that you maintain in the BOM header.
n Maintain authorization objects for bills of materials in the authorization class for Production Planning.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 21
SAP AG 1999
Authorization Objects - Sales Activities
Employee as partner in sales activity
Activity types and organizational units
Sales activities
n There is exactly one authorization object per sales activity that contains both the sales activity type as well as the following organizational units: sales organization, distribution channel, division, sales office and sales group.
n You can maintain the authorization objects for the CAS sales activity in the Sales and Distribution authorization class.
n A particular enhancement for maintenance of authorization objects is available in the Sales Support area. Even if an authorization object has no authorization, you can still grant maintenance or display authorization to certain employees for individual transactions. In Customizing, assign the special function for the personnel partner type and the permitted activity to the sales activity. If an employee is stored as a partner with this specified role in the sales activity, s/he can then implement these activities. In this way you can define, for example, that the Key Account Manager may display all the customer sales activities, for which s/he is maintained as responsible employee. This is possible although the employee does not have authorization for processing documents in the corresponding organizational units.
n Note: You can find the assignment between employee and partner number in the personal master data. Here you can assign an SAP User ID to a personnel number.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 22
SAP AG 1999
Authorization Objects - Sales Document Types
Sales doc. type
1. Sales document types
2. Sales organization
n There are two authorization objects for sales document types: 1. Sales document type and actions (create, change, display)
2. Sales organization, distribution channel, division, actions
n Maintain authorization objects for sales document types in the authorization class for Sales and Distribution.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 23
SAP AG 1999
Delivery block
Blockgoods issue
Block deliverydue list
Block sales orders
Blockrequirements
Block printing
Block picking
STOP
n Delivery blocks are used to take certain processes out of the normal procedure for particular reasons (such as political instability, insufficient stock, payment difficulties) and to prevent any further automatic processing. This means that the procedure stops until the employee responsible can clarify the situation and decide on what to do, at which point s/he can deactivate the delivery block manually.
n You can define delivery blocks in sales documents at header, item, or schedule line level. The block at item level represents a default value for the schedule line(s) of that item.
n You can also set delivery blocks directly in sales document types or schedule line categories. When you create sales documents, the corresponding blocks are then set automatically at header or schedule line level.
n Customizing the blocking reasons in shipping (transactions OVLS, OVLX) controls the effect of the delivery blocks. At header level, you can control whether the blocking reason prevent you from creating a delivery at all or whether certain steps in the sales process are blocked.
n The delivery of sales documents that are blocked at the header level is only prevented when the blocking reason is assigned to the delivery type in Customizing (transaction OVLX).
n If no assignment is defined, the delivery can be created. The blocking reason then has different effects on the different steps in the sales process. The settings in transaction OVLS determine which individual steps are affected: (Blocks: order / picking / requirements / goods receipt / printing / delivery due list).
n In contrast, a block set at the schedule line level always blocks that schedule line for delivery, regardless of the controls described above.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 24
SAP AG 1999
Cancellation
Yes
Accept cancellation date?
Next possiblecancellation date:
03/31/200xManual input
Sales document / Contract data
Cancellation
Cancellation received: 10/01/200x
Contract start: 04/01/2000Contract end: 03/31/2010
Req. cancellation date: 11/01/200x
n Contracts are frequently extended beyond the original contract duration if one of the contract partners has not cancelled it beforehand.
n Example: The contract begins on April 1st. On October 1st, the customer gives notice to cancel for November 1st. However, because the contract cannot be cancelled before the end of its first year, the system issues a warning. You should accept the next possible cancellation date or enter a different one manually.
n For processing the cancellation of regularly extended contracts, you can define a cancellation procedure that contains one or more cancellation rules. The cancellation procedure can be stored in the contract profile and therefore be controlled as a default value in new contracts.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 25
SAP AG 1999
Customizing for Cancellations
Cancellation rule
0001 Canc. up to 1 wk after start
Contract profile0001
Cancellation procedure
Cancellation procedure
Assignment
Canc.procedure Canc. rule
0001
0001
Cancellation date 02
Time limit:Unit of time:
Canc. period: 1Unit of time: 1 day
Rule valid for: 12
0001
0001 01/01/98 - 12/31/2007
0001
0002
n You can define cancellation rules to meet your requirements. They contain the date rule for determining the cancellation date, cancellation notice period and the validity period for the rule.
n Example: � In the example above the customer can cancel the contract within a week. Within this period, he or
she can cancel it daily (that is, at any point in the week). � Another cancellation rule could determine that the cancellation has to take place annually with a
notice period of three months before the next cancellation date.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 26
SAP AG 1999
Grouping Contracts
Contract 2334
Material Value
M3 5PC 5 000 UNI5 000 UNI
M7 1PC 2 300 UNI2 300 UNI
Customer: Smith Inc. Duluth
Contractalreadyfulfilled
Contract 2376
Material Value
M2 5PC 3 000 UNI3 000 UNI
M4 1PC 1 300 UNI1 300 UNI
Customer: Smith Inc. San Fran.
Contract 2378
Material Value
M2 4PC 5 300 UNI
M5 1PC 230 UNI
Customer: Smith Inc. London
Consistent?
VBKD
VBPA
VBAK FPLN
VEDA
Master contract
Lower-level contracts
Doc. Description
2334 Smith Duluth
2376 Smith San Fran.
2378 Smith New York
Customer: Smith AGHeadquarters
Validity: 01/98- 12/98
GrpRefProced: SDGK
n In companies that use a substantial number of contracts for their business, several contracts will often be subject to the same business requirements. You can store these requirements in a master contract and link it to lower-level contracts.
n The master contract contains general conditions that are valid for all the lower-level contracts that refer to it. This ensures that the general data in all the lower-level contracts is consistent.
n In the standard system, sales document type GK is set up as the master contract. n The group contract only contains header data. There are no items in a group contract. You can use
fields from tables in the document header (VBAK), business data (VBKD), partner data (VBPA), contract data (VEDA) and the data from the billing plan header (FPLA).
n The group master contract displays a list of all the links to lower-level contracts. You can then go to the individual contracts from the list.
n If you activated the Update lower-level contract field in Customizing for master contracts, any changes in your master contract are immediately copied into the lower-level contracts. This triggers a workflow that accesses all the individual lower-level contracts. If any errors occur, the person who changed the master contract receives a workitem for manual processing.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 27
SAP AG 1999
Grouping Contracts - Lower-Level Contracts
Lower-level contracts
Group
contract:
Customer: Smith AGHeadquarters
Validity: 01/98- 12/98
Document: 3167
4000167Header fields are copied
according to the
referencing procedure
Procedure: SDGK
n The lower-level contract is a standard document that contains a reference to the master contract. n When you enter the document number in the master contract field, a link is created to the lower-level
contract. n The link means that the system copies all the relevant fields (set in Customizing) from the master
contract to the current lower-level contract. In the referencing requirements, you can control which fields and contract types are permitted for the link.
n Each time an entry is confirmed, the system checks the reference between the master and lower-level contracts with the rules defined in Customizing for the individual fields.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 28
SAP AG 1999
Referencing Requirements
Table Field name Function Rule MessageVBPA KUNNR SP A þ
VEDA VLAUFZ A þ
VBAK AUGRU C ¨
VBKD INCO1 B þ
Doc. type of lower-level cont. Doc. type of group contract
Target Source
MC Maintenance contract GC Group contract
l Maintain reference sales document types
l Define referencing procedures (SDGK)
n Customizing for master contracts takes place in two steps: 1. Define which contract types are permitted as lower-level contracts for the master contract. For
example, you can configure the settings so that only maintenance contracts can link to master contract MC.
2. Define and configure all the fields needed for the reference in the referencing procedure. For each field, choose one of the three following rules:
Rule A - Unique field The link is only possible if the fields in the master and lower-level contracts are identical.
Rule B - Copying field The system copies the values in these fields from the master contract to the lower-level field. Different values in the lower-level contract are not permitted.
Rule C - Proposal field These fields are only copied from the master contract to the referenced lower-level fields if the data agreed before the master contract was changed. They can be overwritten in the lower-level contract. You can activate a message for each field in the referencing procedure that informs you in the lower-level contract of any changes caused by changes in the master contract.
n In Customizing for contracts, you can activate the function Message: Master contract.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 29
Frequently Used Menu Paths
Activity
Menu path
Master data
Logistics è Sales and distribution è Master data
Display sold-to party è Business partnerè Customer è Display
Display material è Products è Material è Other material è Display
Display bill of material è Products è Bills of Material è Bill of Material è Material BOM è Display
Display condition records (prices, discounts/surcharges, free goods, etc.)
è Conditions è Display
Display output master records è Output è Sales document è Display
Customer-material information è Agreements è Customer-Material Info è Display
Order processing
Logistics è Sales and distribution è Sales
Create/change/display order è Order è Create/Change/Display
Create/change/display inquiry è Inquiry è Create/Change/Display
Create/change/display quotation è Quotation è Create/Change/Display
Create/change/display scheduling agreement è Scheduling Agreement è Create/Change/Display
Create/change/display contract è Contract è Create/Change/Display
Display list of orders è Information system è Orders è List of sales documents
Display list of incomplete orders è Information system è Orders è List of incomplete orders
(C) SAP AG SCM605 30
Shipping Logistics è Sales and distribution è Shipping and Transportation
Create/change/display delivery è Outbound delivery è Create/Change/Display
Create transfer order è Picking è Create transfer order è Single Document
Post goods issue è Post goods issue è Outb. delivery Single Document
Billing
Logistics è Sales and distribution è Billing
Create/change/display billing document è Billing Doc è Create/Change/Display
Display financial accounting documents è Billing Doc è Display è Accounting overview
(C) SAP AG SCM605 31
Customizing
Access
Tools è AcceleratedSAP è Customizing è Project editing è Display SAP Reference IMG
Define organizational units
è Enterprise structure è Definition
Maintain sales organization è Sales and Distribution è Define sales organization ... è Define, copy, delete, check Sales Organization
Maintain distribution channel è Sales and Distributionè Define distribution channel ... è Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel
Maintain division è Logistics - General è Define division ... è Define, copy, delete, check division
Maintain sales office è Sales and Distribution è Maintain sales office
Maintain sales group è Sales and Distribution è Maintain sales office
Assign organizational units
è Enterprise structure è Assignment
Sales organization – Company code è Sales and Distribution è Assign sales Organization - Assign sales organization to company code
Sales organization – Distribution channel è Sales and Distribution è Assign distribution channel to sales organization
Sales organization – Division è Sales and Distribution è Assign division to sales organization
Sales area è Sales and Distribution è Set up sales area
Sales area – Sales office è Sales and Distribution è Sales office – Sales area
Sales office – Sales group è Sales and Distribution è Sales group - Assign sales office to sales group
Sales organization – distribution channel - è Sales and Distribution è Assign sales Organization - Distribution
(C) SAP AG SCM605 32
Plant channel – plant
(C) SAP AG SCM605 33
Master data
è Display SAP Reference IMG
Common distribution channels è Sales and Distribution è Master dataè Define common distribution channels
Common divisions è Sales and Distribution è Master data è Define common divisions
Maintain account group è Logistics – General è Business Partner è Customers è Control è Define account groups and field selection for customers
Maintain material type è Logistics – General è Material master è Basic settings è Material types è Define attributes of material types
Basic functions
è Sales and Distribution è Basic Functions
Define pricing procedure è Pricing è Pricing Control è
Define free goods procedure è Free Goods è Condition Technique for Free Goods
Define output è Output Control è Output Determination è Output Determination using Condition Techniqueè ...
Define material determination procedure è Material Determination è ...
Define listing/exclusion procedure è Listing/Exclusion è ...
Partner determination è Partner determination
Incompleteness procedure è Incompleteness è...
Sales document control
è Sales and distribution è Sales è Sales documents
Header Define sales document types è Sales document header è Define sales document types
Restrict sales document types to organizational units
è Sales document header è Assign sales area to sales document types
Item
Define item category è Sales document item è Define item categories
Assign item category è Sales document item è Assign item categories
Sched. Line Define schedule line categories è Schedule lines è Define schedule line categories
Assign schedule line categories è Schedule lines è Assign schedule line categories
Copying control
è Sales and Distribution è Sales è Maintain copying control for sales
(C) SAP AG SCM605 34
documents
Contracts Define value contracts è Contracts è Value contracts è ...
Define contract data è Contracts è Contract data è ...
Shipping
è Logistics Execution è Shipping
Determine shipping points è Basic Shipping Functions è Shipping and Goods Receiving Point Determination
Document control in shipping è Deliveries è ...
Set up delivery blocks è Deliveries è Define reasons for blocking in Shipping
Lean WM è Picking è Lean WM è ...
Billing
è Sales and Distribution è Billing
Define billing document types è Billing documents è Define billing types
Set up billing blocks è Billing documents è Define blocking reasons in Billing
Copying control for billing documents è Billing documents è Maintain copying control for billing documents
Maintain requirements and forms
è Sales and Distribution è System Modification è Routines è ...
(C) SAP AG SCM605 35
Data Used in the Exercises
Organizational units
Data Training system
IDES system Comments
Company code 1000 1000
Sales area 1000/10/00 1000/10/00
Z000/Z0/00 1000/10/00 Additionally configured
Plant 1000 1000
1200 1200
Shipping point 1200 1200
Account group
Data Training
system IDES system Comments
Account group ZK## 0001 External number assignment
You must allow assignment of the new account group to partner functions AG, WE, RG, and RE in partner control.
Sales Doc. Type
Data Training
system IDES system Comments
Order type ZA## OR
(C) SAP AG SCM605 36
Customer master
Training system
IDES system Comments
T-S62A## 2006
AccGrp: 0001 SA: 1000/10/00
T-S62B##
2007 AccGrp: 0001 SA: 1000/10/00
T-S62C## 2006 AccGrp: ZK## SA: 1000/10/00
T-S62D## 1172 AccGrp: 0001 SA: 1000/14/00
T-S62E## 2006 AccGrp: 0001 SA: 1000/10/00
T-S62F## 2006 AccGrp: 0002 SA: 1000/10/00
Legend: AccGrp: Account group SA: Sales area (Sales organization/Distribution channel/Division)
Personnel master record
Data Training system
IDES system Comments
Personnel master record 1701## 1701
(C) SAP AG SCM605 37
Material master
Training system
IDES system
Comments
T-ATA## M-10 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10
T-ATB## M-11 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10
T-ATC## M-12 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10
T-ATD## M-13 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1000 SL: 1000/10 Plant 1200
T-ATE## M-14 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10
T-ATF## R-1120 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10
T-ATG## R-1130 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10
T-FUA## R-1001 MtType: FERT Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10
T-ZSA## I1000 MtType: DIEN Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10 SL: 1000/14
WKM1 New MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10 MtItem: VCIT
Legend: MtType: Material type SL: Sales line (sales organization/distribution channel) MtItem: Item category group To enter sales documents with these materials, perform the following steps: 1. Maintain the material prices 2. Post stocks (movement type 561) or
check the availability with replenishment time (for example, checking group 01) 3. Enter the new material, WKM1, as a value contract material in Customizing of item
category WKN.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 38
SAP AG
R
Service Orders
(C) SAP AG SCM605 39
SAP AG
R
Service OrdersService Orders - Business Background
Many companies do not just sell their products, but also install and maintain them.
In the following scenario, it is your job to implement a service process in your company, IDES. You will need the SD functions in the R/3 Standard System, as your company does not use the Service Management module.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 40
SAP AG
R
Service OrdersService Orders - Order Before Repairs
The request for a repair is created in
the system as a service order.
Before the PC technician travels to the customer,
he takes the required parts from the repairs
workshop.
Order
Cust: 2738
1000 / 10 / 00
10 PC is dead
Order no.: 5718
A PC technician is notified by
automatic mail
MailMail
n A customer phones the service department to request a repair. The employee enters the details in the relevant repair order, including the customer number and a text item describing the repair.
n The employee can enter any particular details (such as type of repair, replacement parts, address) specified by the customer.
n Only complete documents can be saved and they must contain the name of a technician. n When the order is saved, the technician automatically receives a message informing him of the
repair that needs to be done. n A special repairs warehouse contains all the necessary replacement parts and a toolbox. Before the
technician leaves, he or she ensures that they have the necessary equipment.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 41
SAP AG
R
Service OrdersService Orders - Order After Repairs
The service and the resulting expenditure is entered in the order.
Order
Cust: 2738
10 3h repairs20 Hotel30 Journey 40 1 battery
n When the technician has finished the repairs, he or she fills in a form detailing the hours required for the repairs, the hotel, travel costs and the spare parts used.
n Any unused material is sent back to the repairs workshop. n The information in this form is used to enter all services and materials in the order. n As the material specified in the document has already been used, an availability check and transfer
of requirements are not required. n An automatic billing block in the order prevents a billing document from being created too early.
The document is not unblocked until all the items have been entered.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 42
SAP AG
R
Service OrdersService Orders - Delivery
.
Picking is not required. Goods issue is posted automatically e.g. at the
end of each day.
Delivery
Cust:2738
1000 10 00
10 1 battery
Del no: 80002412
The delivery contains the materials used.
X
n Inventory management has to be updated because materials were used. Once all the items have been entered in the order, a delivery can be created and goods issue posted.
n The goods do not need to be picked because they have already been taken from the repairs warehouse.
n Goods issue can be posted manually for a single delivery or automatically in collective processing.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 43
SAP AG
R
Service OrdersService Orders - Billing Documents
An invoice contains all items to be billed and can be created
automatically by collective
processing.
Invoice
Customer: 2738
10 3 h repairs20 Hotel30 Journey40 1 battery
Billing block removed from
order?
n By the time the complete order has been posted, the materials have already been delivered so the order quantity is always the same as the goods issue quantity. This allows the system to create an order-related billing document. Note: The relevant settings must have been configured in copying control.
n All the items in a billing document can be billed together because the billing document for service and material items is related to the order.
n Billing documents can be created manually for single orders or automatically in collective processing, for example, during the night.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 44
SAP AG
R
Service OrdersService Orders - Tasks
l Create a new sales document type
l Configure individual item categories for order and delivery
l Assign suitable schedule line categories to the process
l Extend copying controls
l Add the business partner “PC technician” into the process
l Create automatic output to inform the technician of the commissioned repairs
l Create a text type that can contain special requirements for repairs.
l Test the service order
(C) SAP AG SCM605 45
Scenario: Service Order
• Set up a new document type
• Create service order items
• Set up a partner for the technician
• Create an automatic mail
• Set up text determination (optional)
• Set up copying control
• Test process
Your company maintains and repairs computer equipment at the customer site. The Service Management (SM) component is not used by your company.
One of your customers informs you by telephone that they are having problems with their computer. An experienced employee decides that the problem has to be solved by a technician at the site and decides which spare parts they will need. The technician is automatically informed. He owns a "spare parts" tool box which he fills by taking parts from the warehouse. The order confirmation contains the service (for example, technician category, hours taken) and a reminder that the dollar amount of the invoice depends on the time taken and cost of the repair. The technician returns any unused parts to the warehouse and enters the materials he used, the time the repair took and travelling expenses (for example: taxi, hotel) in an overview sheet. This sheet is used to create an invoice for the customer.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 46
1-1 Sales document type Create a sales document type ZS## with description Service##-order.
1-1-1 Copy the reference OR standard order and use the same copying controls.
1-1-2 Prevent external number assignment.
1-1-3 Prevent the system from reading the customer-material info records.
1-1-4 De-activate the settings for credit limit checks.
1-1-5 De-activate the checks for open quotations and contracts.
1-1-6 Set the billing block 02 No completion confirmation.
1-1-7 De-activate the settings for payment card processing.
1-1-8 Use the current date as the requested delivery item.
1-1-9 Services are processed in distribution channel 14 (Services). Repairs are only carried out in sales organization 1000. Make sure that the new document type ZS## can only be used in sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 14.
1-2 Delivery and transportation scheduling De-activate delivery and transportation scheduling for the new sales document type ZS##. Note: Do this in Customizing for Basic Functions.
1-3 Item: consumable item Check which item category has been assigned to sales document type ZS##.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 47
1-3-1 Which item category does the system determine for materia ls in the item category group NORM? ____________________________________________________________
1-3-2 Why does this assignment already exist for the sales document type ZS## that you created? ____________________________________________________________
1-3-3 When you enter consumable items, the system does not run an availability check, there is no transfer of requirements and picking is not necessary. However, you do need to post goods issue in order to update inventory management. Since the delivery quantity (goods issue quantity) is the same as the order quantity, you can invoice these items using order-related billing, like service items. This means that you can invoice the customer for all the items in the sales document without any further processing. Create the new item category ZS## with description Consum. item ## by copying item category TAN. Configure the item category so that order-related billing is executed. De-activate the Credit Management functions. Configure the system so that it finds the new item category ZS## for materials in item category group NORM in the service order. Do not permit any other item categories. Note: Call up the details screen for the table entry.
1-3-4 Which schedule line category does the system find for the material in your service order that controls the MRP indicator for material T-ATO## (plant: 1200)? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ What is the difference between schedule line category CV and category CN? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Change the schedule line category assignment so that the system finds schedule line category CN for consumable items such as T-ATO## (plant: 1200).
1-3-5 De-activate the Picking-relevant indicator for item category ZS## in the delivery.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 48
1-4 Copying control You need to configure your copying control so that you can create an order-related billing document for item category ZS## in sales document type ZS##.
1-5 Item: Service Configure your sales document type ZS## so that item category TAD Services is automatically assigned to items with services (materials from item category group DIEN). Do not permit any alternative item categories.
1-6 Partner determination If you need a technician to carry out the repair, you need to record this information in the service order. The technician should then be informed automatically by mail when he is needed. Set up the necessary partner controls to allow this to happen.
1-6-1 Define a new partner function GG with description PC technician ## (GG = ## +10). Choose the suitable partner type for this function.
1-6-2 Define a new partner determination procedure ZS## with description Service procedure ZS## for sales documents and copy the following partner functions into this procedure: – SP Sold-to party – BP Bill-to party – PY Payer – SH Ship-to party – GG PC technician ## Create all the partners as mandatory partners.
1-6-3 Assign procedure ZS## to your sales document type ZS##.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 49
1-7 Output The PC technician entered in your service order should automatically receive a mail telling him when he is needed. This output should be created when you save the sales order and appear automatically as mail in the employee's office inbox.
1-7-1 Create a relevant output type by copying the output type MAIL from the standard R/3 System with all its dependent entries. Key: ZM## Description: Go to customer ##
1-7-2 Maintain appropriate default values for the output master records for output type ZM##.
1-7-3 Create the relevant mail data in the output type. Document title: Service Mail ## Mail text: You have a repair order. Customer: &VBAK-KUNNR& Order: &VBAK-VBELN& Good luck!
1-7-4 Assign the output type ZM## to partner function GG.
1-7-5 Assign a suitable processing program to output type ZM## by copying the entry which controls output type MAIL.
1-7-6 Change the output in output determination procedure V10000 for orders. Add step 60 + ## with condition type ZM## and activate requirement 2. How does this requirement affect the output? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
1-7-7 Create a master record for the new output. Adopt the default values from the condition record.
1-7-8 When your PC technician receives the automatic mail about the customer visit, he should be able to go directly from the mail to the sales document so that he can obtain all the information he needs for the visit. To do this, save the relevant communication data in the master record for output type ZM##:
(C) SAP AG SCM605 50
Parameter: VBAK-VBELN (Sales document number) ID: AUN (Field in transaction that contains the document number) Transaction code: VA03 (Display sales document) Indicate that the output is an express mail.
1-8 Text (optional) When you enter a service order, you want to be able to save specifications about the order as a text in the document (for example, equipment serial numbers, discounts, times, directions, telephone numbers).
1-8-1 Create a new text type for the sales document header: Text ID: ZS## Description: Visit info ##
1-8-2 Check which text determination procedure is used by your sales document type. Procedure: ______________________________________________
1-8-3 Expand this procedure to include your new text type ZS##.
1-8-4 Create a new text type for the sales document item: Text ID: ZS## Description: Repair text ##
1-8-5 Check which text determination procedure is used by item category TATX. Text procedure: ______________________________________________
1-8-6 Add the new item text ZS## to this procedure.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 51
1-9 Customer master record Customer T-L63A## places an order for repairing computer equipment. Extend the customer master record with data from sales area 1000 14 00. Use the data created for sales area 1000 10 00 as your reference.
1-9-1 Extend the relevant customer master record: – Customer: T-L63A## – Sales area: 1000 14 00 – Reference customer: T-L63A## – Sales area: 1000 10 00
1-9-2 Check your company structure to see which delivering plants are permitted for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 14. Enter a valid delivering plant in the customer master record for service processing.
1-9-3 The PC technician brings all the materials he needs to repair the equipment with him and the journey is entered as a separate item in the order, so choose the Free house (FH) Incoterms in the customer master record. You have agreed on the following terms of payment with your customer for service orders: – Payment within 10 days: 2 % – Payment within 30 days: 1 % – Payment within 50 days: no discount – Tax classification: 1
1-10 Material master record: Consumable item During the repair, the monitor has to be replaced (material T-ATO##). Change the material so that your service department (sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 14) can also use it. To do this, copy the values from the sales line 1000 10.
1-11 Material master record: Service material T-ATP## is a service material. Change the material so that it can also be used by your service department (sales line 1000 14). Copy the values from sales line 1000 10, and change the item category group to DIEN.
1-12 Service order Test your settings by processing a service order in the R/3 System.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 52
1-12-1 Enter a service order your customer T-L63A##. Enter sales area 1000 10 00. Does it work? ____________________________________________________________ Why? ____________________________________________________________
1-12-2 Enter a service order for customer T-L63A## but do not enter a sales area. Customer: T-L63A## PO number: Service order ## Sales area: ______________________________________________ Can you enter a sales document number manually? ____________________________________________________________ Why? ____________________________________________________________ What are the terms of delivery for the order? ____________________________________________________________ What are the terms of payment? ____________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 53
1-12-3 Enter a text item which documents the repair. In the Description field, enter the text "PC repairs". Optional: Maintain the repair text ## for the item by entering the number of the PC that needs to be repaired. Optional: Maintain a route description at header level under text type Repair info ##.
1-12-4 Was output type ZM## automatically found for the document? ____________________________________________________________ Why? (You can use the condition analysis for the output to see why.) ____________________________________________________________
1-12-5 Call up the incompletion log. Assign the employee with personnel number 1701## as the PC technician responsible for the order. Note: The personnel master record for employee 1701## contains user ID Mayer-## in info category 105 "Communication".
1-12-6 Save the complete document. Check the processing status of output type ZM## in the document. ____________________________________________________________
1-12-7 Log on as user Mayer-## and password LO606. Call up the output, check the message and call up the document.
1-12-8 Once you have finished the repairs, you enter the service provided in the order. Your technician has installed a new monitor. Set the requested delivery date to one week from today's date. Enter the service and the materials used in the repair in the relevant service order. Replace the text item in the order with the service material. Material: T-ATP## (3 hours) Material: T-ATO## (1 piece) How does the system respond? ____________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 54
Not all the items or schedule lines in a sales document are needed in the delivery and billing documents. Which item and schedule line categories does the system find? Item 10: ___________________________________________ Item 20: ___________________________________________ Check in Customizing which schedule lines from the sales document generate items in the delivery document. Why? Item 10: ____________________________________________________ Item 20: ____________________________________________________
1-13 Delivery Deliver the order (shipping point: 1200). Set the selection date to a week's time.
1-13-1 Which delivery item category does the system find for the consumable item? Delivery item category: _________________________________________
1-13-2 Post goods issue. Is picking necessary? ____________________________________________________________ Why? ____________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 55
1-14 Billing document Bill the order.
1-14-1 What message do you receive? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
1-14-2 Delete the billing block in the sales order.
1-14-3 Bill the order now (selection date a week from today). Do both items due for billing appear in the billing document? ____________________________________________________________
1-14-4 Is the data forwarded to Accounting? ____________________________________________________________
1-14-5 Call up the document flow in Billing. Can you see the delivery? ____________________________________________________________
1-14-6 Call up the document flow from the sales order. Is the process completed as far as sales and distribution is concerned? Why? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
(C) SAP AG SCM605 56
Scenario: Service Order
• Set up a new document type
• Create service order items
• Set up a partner for the technician
• Create an automatic mail
• Set up text determination (optional)
• Set up copying control
• Test process
Your company maintains and repairs computer equipment at the customer site. The Service Management (SM) component is not used by your company.
One of your customers informs you by telephone that they are having problems with their computer. An experienced employee decides that the problem has to be solved by a technician at the site and decides which spare parts they will need. The technician is automatically informed. He owns a "spare parts" tool box which he fills by taking parts from the warehouse. The order confirmation contains the service (for example, technician category, hours taken) and a reminder that the dollar amount of the invoice depends on the time taken and cost of the repair. The technician returns any unused parts to the warehouse and enters the materials he used, the time the repair took and travelling expenses (for example: taxi, hotel) in an overview sheet. This sheet is used to create an invoice for the customer.
1-1 Sales document type Create a sales document type ZS## with description Service##-order.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 57
1-1-1 Copy the reference OR standard order and use the same copying controls. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header → Define sales document types → Select sales document type OR → Choose "Copy as" Key: ZS## Description: Service##-order
1-1-2 Prevent external number assignment. → Select ZS## → Choose "Details" No. range ext. assgt field: empty
1-1-3 Prevent the system from reading the customer-material info records. Read info record field: empty
1-1-4 De-activate the settings for credit limit checks. Check credit limit field: empty Credit group field: empty
1-1-5 De-activate the checks for open quotations and contracts. Quotation messages field: empty Contract messages field: empty
1-1-6 Set the billing block 02 No completion confirmation. Billing block field: 02 compl. confirmation missing
1-1-7 De-activate the settings for payment card processing. Payment guarantee procedure field: empty Payment card plan type field: empty Checking group field: empty
1-1-8 Use the current date as the requested delivery item. Lead time in days field: empty
1-1-9 Services are processed in distribution channel 14 (Services). Repairs are only carried out in sales organization 1000. Make sure that the new document type ZS## can only be used in sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 14.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 58
IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header → Assign sales areas to sales document types → Assign sales order types permitted for sales areas Delete all the entries for document type ZS## except those for sales area 1000 14 00. Note: You can gain an overview of the available entries by choosing "Variable list".
1-2 Delivery and transportation scheduling De-activate delivery and transportation scheduling for the new sales document type ZS##. Note: Do this in Customizing for Basic Functions. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Delivery Scheduling and Transportation Scheduling → Define scheduling by sales document type DlvSchedlg field: empty TranspSch field: empty
1-3 Item: consumable item Check which item category has been assigned to sales document type ZS##.
1-3-1 Which item category does the system determine for materials in the item category group NORM? IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories TAN
1-3-2 Why does this assignment already exist for the sales document type ZS## that you created? When you copied the sales document type OR, all of the entries for item controls were also copied for document type ZS##.
1-3-3 When you enter consumable items, the system does not run an availability check, there is no transfer of requirements and picking is not necessary. However, you do need to post goods issue in order to update inventory management. Since the delivery quantity (goods issue quantity) is the same as
(C) SAP AG SCM605 59
the order quantity, you can invoice these items using order-related billing, like service items. This means that you can invoice the customer for all the items in the sales document without any further processing. Create the new item category ZS## with description Consum. item ## by copying item category TAN. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sale Document Item → Define item categories → Select item category TAN → Choose "Copy as" Key: ZS## Description: Consumable item ## Configure the item category so that order-related billing is executed. De-activate the Credit Management functions. Relev. for billing field: B Relevant for order-related billing - status according to order quantity Credit active field: empty Configure the system so that it finds the new item category ZS## for materials in item category group NORM in the service order. Do not permit any other item categories. Note: Call up the details screen for the table entry. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories → Choose "Position" Sales document type: ZS## Item category group: NORM Item usage: empty ItemCat-HgLevelItem: empty Default item category: ZS## (overwrite TAN) → Choose "Details"→ delete all other item categories
1-3-4 Which schedule line category does the system find for the material in your service order that controls the MRP indicator for material T-ATO## (plant: 1200)? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Trading goods → Display → Enter material number → Select view(s) → Choose MRP 1 MRP type: VM
(C) SAP AG SCM605 60
IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Assign schedule line categories PropSchdLineCategory: CV What is the difference between schedule line category CV and category CN? IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Define schedule line categoriess Transfer of requirements and the availability check are de-activated for schedule line category CN. Change the schedule line category assignment so that the system finds schedule line category CN for consumable items such as T-ATO## (plant: 1200). IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Assign schedule line categories Entry: ZS## VM CN All materials that contain MRP type VM in the material master are assigned to schedule line category CN. Also Entry: ZS## empty CN All materials that do not contain an MRP type in the material master are assigned to schedule line category CN.
1-3-6 De-activate the Picking-relevant indicator for item category ZS## in the delivery. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Shipping → Deliveries → Define item categories for deliveries → Select ZS## → Choose "Details" Relevant for picking field: empty
1-4 Copying control You need to configure your copying control so that you can create an order-related billing document for item category ZS## in sales document type ZS##. Note: go to Copying Controls for Billing Documents and choose Sales document ZS## → Billing document F2 and branch to item level. Copy the entry for item category TAD to item category ZS##. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing documents → Maintain copying control for billing documents
(C) SAP AG SCM605 61
→ Copying Control: Sales Document to Billing Document → Choose "Display -> Change" → Choose "Position": Billing type F2 from SalesDocType ZS## → Select entry → Choose "Item" → Select TAD → Choose "Copy as …" → Overwrite the Item category field with ZS##
1-5 Item: Service Configure your sales document type ZS## so that item category TAD Services is automatically assigned to items with services (materials from item category group DIEN). Do not permit any alternative item categories. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories → Choose "Position" SaTy (sales document type): ZS## ItCGr (item category group): DIEN Use (item usage): empty HLevItCa (higher level item category): empty DfItC (default item category): TAD (overwrite TAX) → Select entry → Choose "Details"→ Delete all alternative item categories
1-6 Partner determination If you need a technician to carry out the repair, you need to record this information in the service order. The technician should then be informed automatically by mail when he is needed. Set up the necessary partner controls to allow this to happen. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Partner Determination
1-6-1 Define a new partner function GG with description PC technician ## (GG = ## +10). Choose the suitable partner type for this function. → Define partner functions → Choose "Partner functions" New entry → Function: GG (##+10) → Description: PC technician ## → Partner type: PE
(C) SAP AG SCM605 62
1-6-2 Define a new partner determination procedure ZS## with description Service procedure ZS## for sales documents and copy the following partner functions into this procedure: – SP Sold-to party – BP Bill-to party – PY Payer – SH Ship-to party – GG PC technician ## → Define and assign partner determination procedures → Select "Sales document header" → Choose "Partner procedures" New entry: Key: ZS## Description: Service procedure ## → Save → Select ZS## → Choose "Procedure details" → Maintain your entries Create all the partners as mandatory partners. Mandat. function field: Select for all partners
1-6-3 Assign procedure ZS## to your sales document type ZS##. → Define and assign parter determination procedure → Choose Sales Document Header → Select ZS## Procedure → Choose "Procedure assignment" → Change entry: Sales document type ZS## → Procedure ZS##
(C) SAP AG SCM605 63
1-7 Output The PC technician entered in your service order should automatically receive a mail telling him when he is needed. This output should be created when you save the sales order and appear automatically as mail in the employee's office inbox. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Output → Output Determination → Output Proposal Using the Condition Technique
1-7-1 Create a relevant output type by copying the output type MAIL from the standard R/3 System with all its dependent entries. → Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents → Maintain output types → Choose "Change" → Select output type MAIL → Choose "Copy as" → Choose "Copy all" when prompted Key: ZM## Description: Go to customer ##
1-7-2 Maintain appropriate default values for the output master records for output type ZM##. Transm. medium: 7 Part. Function: GG Time: 4 → Select ZM## → Choose "Details"
1-7-3 Create the relevant mail data in the output type. → Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents → Maintain output types → Choose "Change" → Select output type ZM## → Choose "Mail message title" → Language: EN → Document title: Service Mail ## → Select entry → Choose "Mail texts" You have a repair order. Customer: &VBAK-KUNNR& Order: &VBAK-VBELN& Good luck!
(C) SAP AG SCM605 64
1-7-4 Assign the output type ZM## to partner function GG. → Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents → Assign output types to partner functions → Select MAIL → Choose "Copy as" → Output type: ZM## (overwrite) → Medium: 7 → Function: GG (overwrite)
1-7-5 Assign a suitable processing program to output type ZM## by copying the entry which controls output type MAIL. → Process Output and Forms → Assign forms and programs → Assign to sales documents → Select MAIL → Choose "Copy as" → Output type: ZM## (overwrite)
1-7-6 Change the output in output determination procedure V10000 for orders. Add step 60 + ## with condition type ZM## and activate requirement 2. → Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents → Maintain output determination procedure → Select procedure V10000 → Choose "Control" → Choose "New entries" → Step: 60+## → Counter: 1 → CType: ZM## → Requirement: 2 How does this requirement affect the output? Requirement 2 means that output ZM## is only activated in the document once the document is complete. For example, if the PC technician has been defined as an mandatory partner, the output is only activated in the document if a valid personnel number has been assigned to partner function GG in the sales document.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 65
1-7-7 Create a master record for the new output. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Output → Sales document → Create → Output type: ZM## → Sales document type: ZS## Adopt the default values from the condition record. → Choose "Enter" (default values are copied from the master record)
1-7-8 When your PC technician receives the automatic mail about the customer visit, he should be able to go directly from the mail to the sales document so that he can obtain all the information he needs for the visit. To do this, save the relevant communication data in the master record for output type ZM##: Choose "Communication" Parameter: VBAK-VBELN (Sales document number) ID: AUN (Field in transaction that contains the document number) Transaction code: VA03 (Display sales document) Indicate that the output is an express mail. Select "Send express"
1-8 Text (optional) When you enter a service order, you want to be able to save specifications about the order as a text in the document (for example, equipment serial numbers, discounts, times, directions, telephone numbers). IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Text Determination
1-8-1 Create a new text type for the sales document header: → Define text types → Select "Sales document header" → Choose "Text types" Text ID: ZS## Description: Visit info ##
1-8-2 Check which text determination procedure is used by your sales document type.
(C) SAP AG SCM605 66
→ Define and assign text determination procedures → Select "Sales document header" → Choose "Text procedure" Procedure: Procedure 01
1-8-3 Expand this procedure to include your new text type ZS##. → Select text procedure 01 → Choose "Texts in procedure" → Add new text type to end
1-8-4 Create a new text type for the sales document item: → Define text types → Select "Sales document item" → Choose "Text types" Text ID: ZS## Description: Repair text ##
1-8-5 Check which text determination procedure is used by item category TATX. → Define and assign text determination procedures → Select "Sales document item" → Choose "Text procedure" Text procedure: 01
1-8-6 Add the new item text ZS## to this procedure. → Select text procedure 01 → Choose "Texts in procedure" → Add your new text type to the end of the list
1-9 Customer master record Customer T-L63A## places an order for repairing computer equipment. Extend the customer master record with data from sales area 1000 14 00. Use the data created for sales area 1000 10 00 as your reference. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Business partners → Sold-to party → Create → Create
1-9-1 Extend the relevant customer master record: – Customer: T-L63A## – Sales area: 1000 14 00 – Reference customer: T-L63A##
(C) SAP AG SCM605 67
– Sales area: 1000 10 00
1-9-2 Check your company structure to see which delivering plants are permitted for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 14. Enter a valid delivering plant in the customer master record for service processing. → Customer master record: Shipping view → F4 help on the "Delivering plant" field → Plant 1200 Or: IMG → Enterprise Structure → Maintain structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution → Assign plant to sales organization and distribution channel → Only plant 1200 has been assigned to entry 1000 14
1-9-3 The PC technician brings all the materials he needs to repair the equipment with him and the journey is entered as a separate item in the order, so choose the Free house (FH) Incoterms in the customer master record. → Customer master record: Billing view → Incoterms: FH You have agreed on the following terms of payment with your customer for service orders: – Payment within 10 days: 2 % – Payment within 30 days: 1 % – Payment within 50 days: no discount → Payment terms: 0005 – Tax classification: 1 → Tax classific.: 1
(C) SAP AG SCM605 68
1-10 Material master record: Consumable item During the repair, the monitor has to be replaced (material T-ATO##). Change the material so that your service department (sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 14) can also use it. To do this, copy the values from the sales line 1000 10. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products Material → Trading goods → Create Material: T-ATO## Copy from material: T-ATO## Select views for Sales Org. Data 1 and Sales Org. Data 2 Organizational levels: Sales organization: 1000 Distribution channel: 14 Copy from organizational levels: Sales organization: 1000 Distribution channel: 10
1-11 Material master record: Service material T-ATP## is a service material. Change the material so that it can also be used by your service department (sales line 1000 14). Copy the values from sales line 1000 10, and change the item category group to DIEN. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Material → Services → Create Material: T-ATP## Copy from material: T-ATP## → Copy data (see above) and change item category group to DIEN
(C) SAP AG SCM605 69
1-12 Service order Test your settings by processing a service order in the R/3 System. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create Order type: ZS##
1-12-1 Enter a service order your customer T-L63A##. Enter sales area 1000 10 00. Does it work? No. Message: Order type ZS## has not been defined for sales area 1000 10 00. Why? In Customizing, you configured the document type so that it was only valid for sales area 1000 14 00.
1-12-2 Enter a service order for customer T-L63A## but do not enter a sales area. Customer: T-L63A## PO number: Service order ## Sales area: 1000 14 00 (determined when you choose "Enter") Can you enter a sales document number manually? No Why? External number assignment field was not activated for sales document type ZS##. What are the terms of delivery for the order? → Goto → Header → Billing or → Goto→ Overview → Sales → Incoterms:FH What are the terms of payment? → Payt terms: 0005
1-12-3 Enter a text item which documents the repair. In the Description field, enter the text "PC repairs".
(C) SAP AG SCM605 70
Optional: Maintain the repair text ## for the item by entering the number of the PC that needs to be repaired. → Select item → Choose "Details"→ Choose "Texts" tab page → Edit "Repair text ##" Optional: Maintain a route description at header level under text type Repair info ##. → Back → Choose "Hdr" → Choose "Texts" tab page → Edit text type "Visit info##"
1-12-4 Was output type ZM## automatically found for the document? → Extras → Output → Header No (no entry) Why? (You can use the condition analysis for the output to see why.) → Goto → Determin. analysis The document is still incomplete. This means that requirement 002 in the output determination procedure has not been met and output type ZM## has therefore not been processed.
1-12-5 Call up the incompletion log. Assign the employee with personnel number 1701## as the PC technician responsible for the order. → Back → Edit → Incompletion log → Complete data → Enter personnel number Note: The personnel master record for employee 1701## contains user ID Mayer-## in info category 105 "Communication".
1-12-6 Save the complete document. Check the processing status of output type ZM## in the document. → Sales document → Change → Extras → Output → Header → Green traffic light = successfully processed (OR → Select output → Choose "Further data")
1-12-7 Log on as user Mayer-## and password LO606. Call up the output, check the message and call up the document. → Office → Inbox → Choose "Office" → Select mail message
(C) SAP AG SCM605 71
→ Output contains customer and order number → Choose "Execute" → The system displays the document.
1-12-8 Once you have finished the repairs, you enter the service provided in the order. Your technician has installed a new monitor. Set the requested delivery date to one week from today's date. Enter the service and the materials used in the repair in the relevant service order. Replace the text item in the order with the service material. Material: T-ATP## (3 hours) Material: T-ATO## (1 piece) How does the system respond? → It determines a new item category for the text item. Not all the items or schedule lines in a sales document are needed in the delivery and billing documents. Which item and schedule line categories does the system find? Item 10: TAD / CD Item 20: ZS## / CN Check in Customizing which schedule lines from the sales document generate items in the delivery document. Why? Item 10: No, schedule line category is not relevant to delivery Item 20: Yes, schedule line category is relevant to delivery
(C) SAP AG SCM605 72
1-13 Delivery Deliver the order (shipping point: 1200). Set the selection date to a week's time. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Shipping → Delivery → Create → Selection date: today in a week
1-13-1 Which delivery item category does the system find for the consumable item? Delivery item category: ZS##
1-13-2 Post goods issue. Is picking necessary? No. Why? Picking was de-activated for this item category. Delivery number____________________________________________
1-14 Billing document Bill the order. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document→ Create → Selection date:a week from today
1-14-1 What message do you receive? No billing documents have been created. Log: The sales document is blocked for billing.
1-14-2 Delete the billing block in the sales order. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change
1-14-3 Bill the order now (selection date a week from today). Do both items due for billing appear in the billing document? Yes
1-14-4 Is the data forwarded to Accounting?
(C) SAP AG SCM605 73
Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document → Change → Choose "Accounting" Yes
1-14-5 Call up the document flow in Billing. Can you see the delivery? → Environment → Document flow No
1-14-6 Call up the document flow from the sales order. Is the process completed as far as sales and distribution is concerned? Why? Yes. All the documents have status "completed". The accounting document is not cleared.